Home

MGC Manager User's Guide VoicePlus Edition - Support

1. x General Scheduler Settings Participants Ongoing State r General Settings jc lt lt Basic I Confer Lock i I Hut r r T Aut A Before First Join f5 Min After Last Quit PH ter Last Quit i Min Media Settings Audio Alg 56 G711 lt lt Basic Audio Mix Depth E H Sites Cancel Apply Help In an Operator conference all fields not relevant to the Operator conference such as IVR Service are disabled 5 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Click the Participants tab The Conference Properties Participants dialog box opens Debbie Properties Prod janagement In an Operator Conference one participant must be defined the operator The operator adds the second participant interactively during an On Going Conference Define the operator as a new participant or if the operator is already defined in a Participant Template file or in the Participant database add the operator to the conference 7 7 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing 7 Click OK The Operator conference is added to the list of On Going Conferences a MCUs Network Product Management Normal g MCU Configuration i On Going Conferences 2 ia Audio conf E POLYCOM c Participants Queue 0 Fe BS Reservations 0 pag Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 6 To save this conference for future use copy the conference to
2. 7 12 Participants Queue Toolbar eee eeseesecesececeeeeeneceneceeeeneesneens 7 14 Participant Queue Filter Toolbar cece eseesceseeeneeeeeeeeeneees 7 14 Using Participants Queue Filters 0 eee eeeeeeees 7 15 The Attended Participants Dialog BOX eeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeneeeeeees 7 21 Moving the Attended Participant to the Destination CONTEPENCE sinais ninni airna iini aiat 7 29 Operator Joining a Conference oie eee eects eeeeeeees 7 33 Managing Attended Participants from the Browser Status and Monitor Panes c s cesssesseveavseceseaenesdecconteveessaasercoteepegans orii eai 7 34 Selecting the Participants to Manage sesseeesseesseesrerrsreesrsrrse 7 34 Performing Operations using the Right Click Menu 0 0 7 36 Moving a Participant to the Operator Conference 7 36 Moving a Participant to the Home Conference 0 0 7 37 Placing a Participant On Hold oo eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 40 Performing Operations Using the Participants Queue Toolbar 7 42 Performing Operations Using Shortcut Keys oo eee 7 43 Moving a Participant Interactively oe eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 44 Moving Multiple Participants to the Home Conference 7 44 Appendix A Glossary 00 0c eee eee eee eee eee A 1 vi VoicePlus Overview VoicePlus is the conferencing system of the Polycom MCU that enables Audio Only conferencing The VoicePlus system includes special features such as the Interactive Voice Respon
3. 4 43 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Conducting a Voting Session The operator or the chairperson manages the voting session To manage a voting session conference 1 In the Browser or Monitor panes right click the conference icon and then click Voting Stop Monitoring Monitor Filter New Participant F8 Terminate Del Ctrl C Gorey Ctr P Lock Conference Mute Meet Me parties On Join to F10 Print Reservation Data Properties 4 44 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition The Voting dialog box opens You can now configure the settings for the voting session UI OOOO 6 6h hl m Voting Settings r Voting results Title Number of participants f0 Number of voters 0 Company car model Choices d option 0 Mazda 323 4 1 option 1 Ford Focus option 2 Mitsubishi Vo ti n g option 3 results a option 4 option 5 option 6 foption 7 0 0 aps Ue EUs lie SAS AB A Ue Ur d option 8 option 3 I7 Show results as percentage with reference to T Anonymous Vote Voters ony All Participants I Show results as number of votes Apply Details Results Voting settings OoOnonnner wn Oo Command buttons The Voting dialog box information is organized in these sections Voting Settings where you define the voting session parameters Voting Results where the system di
4. Clipboard To copy the list of DTMF codes to the clipboard for use by other applications MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition 5 Click OK If you select the Report To File option a browser dialog box opens 6 Enter the file name select the destination directory and then click Save In the sample text file of DTMF codes the first column lists the function to be performed the DTMF name the second column lists the DTMF string to be used and the third column lists the required permission P IvR70 IYR txt Notepad l0 x Fie Edit Format View Help IVR Service IVR70 Request Private Assistance Request assistance for Conference Mute My Line unmute My Line Lock Conference Unlock Conference secure Conference Unsecure Conference Increase My Broadcasting volume Decrease My Broadcasting volume Mute All but Me Cancel Mute All but Me Change Password Place Conference On Hold Reinstate On Hold Conference Mute Dial In Participants Cancel Mute Dial In Participants Start voting session Stop voting Session New Voting Session Cancel voting Session Ask a Question Cancel My Question Next in Line Question End Current Question Cancel All Questions Dial out to Invitee Admit Invitee amp Continue Dial out Disconnect Invitee amp Continue Dial out Admit Invitee amp Return to Conference Disconnect Invitee amp Return to Conference Rol call Review Names Roll call stop Review Names Start
5. Listing Meeting Rooms Meeting Rooms are listed under the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories category in the MCU list To view the Meeting Rooms list in the Browser pane 1 In the Browser pane expand the MCU tree 2 Expand the Meeting Rooms tree The system displays the list of the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories es Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 22 Active Meeting is 1000 Room Green 3333 DS Tar 46788 Inactive Meeting aaaa Room Gray eas Audio 7 The number of Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories currently defined for this MCU appears in brackets next to the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories icon Active Meeting Rooms are displayed in green Inactive Meeting Rooms are displayed in gray 5 11 Chapter 5 Meeting Rooms and Entry Queues 5 12 To view the Meeting Rooms list in the Status pane You can also view the list of Meeting Rooms in the Status pane This enables you to easily retrieve the Numeric ID passwords dial in numbers and H 323 Network Service Prefix assigned to the Meeting Room This is especially useful when the dialing parameters were automatically allocated by the system In the Browser pane in the MCU tree click the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories icon The Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories are listed in the Status pane Name Status Duration 1D Gavi nab Gtr Passnor d arpers
6. This tab appears only if the Meet Me Per Conf option is selected in the General the system defaults you do not need to select this option MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition 9 Define the following Meeting Room parameters Table 5 1 Meeting Room Properties Meet Me Per Conf Limited Select this option to limit the number of times that the Sequences Meeting Room can be activated If this check box is cleared the number of activations is unlimited and the Meeting Room can be saved on the MCU indefinitely or until it is deleted from the MCU Number of This option is enabled when the Limited Sequences Occurrences option is selected Define the number of times the Meeting Room will be activated You can choose any number of Meeting Rooms activations 0 means that the conference has an unlimited number of activations and can be in sleep mode passive forever 1 means that the conference will be activated once and then it will be deleted from the system 2 or more means that the conference will be activated twice or more and the conference will remain in sleep mode passive in between recurrences ISDN Service Displays the ISDN Network Service Name and dial in numbers assigned to the Meeting Room Note T1 CAS Network Service name and dial in numbers are also displayed in this section Click the plus oP button to add dial in numbers to the ISDN Network Service and the minus button to remove dial in numbers
7. Meeting Rooms and Entry Queues Meeting Rooms are used for on demand conferencing Entry Queues are a single dial lobby for routing participants to their target conferences without having to allocate dial in numbers to each conference or Meeting Room Entry Queues are also used for Ad Hoc conferencing to start On Going Conferences without prior scheduling This chapter describes the definition of Meeting Rooms and single dial Entry Queues that are used for routing participants to their destination conferences Meeting Rooms Meeting Rooms are conferences that have no allocated resources on the MCU or a Starting date and time They are created once but remain on the MCU in Passive mode and can be activated as many times as required When the conference ends the conference reverts to the passive Meeting Room mode until the next activation It remains in the MCU memory configuration and is displayed in the Meeting Rooms list For a detailed description of Ad Hoc Conferencing see MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication The Meeting Room is activated when the first participant connects to it The conference connection information is given to all other participants by the Meeting Room owner The Meeting Room is terminated when the last participant disconnects from the conference or when the chairperson leaves the conference depending on the conference settings However Meeti
8. Network capabilities TCP IP For detailed information about how to install the MGC Manager application how to connect to the MGC unit and how to use its main window menus and toolbar buttons refer to the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Chapter 3 MGC Manager Basics This manual assumes the user has the following knowledge Familiarity with Windows 98 Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP environment and interface Basic knowledge of audio conferencing concepts and terminology Familiarity with the Polycom Quick Start Guide for your MCU Familiarity with the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 3 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition VoicePlus Commands Shortcut Keys G In MGC Manager you can quickly accomplish frequently performed tasks by using shortcut keys For example pressing lt CTRL gt lt R gt connects or reconnects a participant to an On Going Conference e The predefined shortcut keys can be modified using the Configure Shortcut function from the Options menu For more details see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 5 Configurable Shortcut Keys on page 5 149 e When upgrading the MGC Manager from version 6 0 or earlier click Configure Shortcuts on the Options menu and then click Restore Defaults to update the default shortcut keys The following default shortcut keys are used in VoicePlus MGC Manager Table 1 1 VoicePlus Commands Shortcut lt Ctrl
9. To remove a range of dial in numbers select the range to remove and click the minus icon When no dial in number ranges are defined in the filter dial in number is not used as a criterion for displaying a participant in the Participants Queue window 7 18 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 7 5 Participants Queue Filter Options Continued Add to Personal This check box is selected by default Favorites Select this check box to save the filter for future use and add it to the list of filters that you can use When viewing the list of Filters in the Filter list in the MGC Manager Toolbar the Filters are labeled Personal Filter Name Note This option appears only when creating the filter in the database Add to Public This check box appears only if you have the Favorites permission to create modify Public filters Select this check box to save this Filter as a Public Filter for use by all users When viewing the list of Filters in the Filter list in the MGC Manager Toolbar Public Filters are labeled Public Filter Name Note This option appears only when creating the filter in the database Once the filter is defined you can preview its selection by clicking the Preview button If you want to further modify it do so or save the filter for future use by selecting the Add to Favorites option Click the Preview button to apply the filter to the Participants Queue before saving it and add
10. Window Help New Window Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Arrange Icons vi s in AccordDB Expand the Default templates tree until you locate the desired Reservation template 1 13 Chapter 1 VoicePlus Overview To start an On Going Audio Only Conference right click the icon of the Default Audio template and then click Start Immediately U Reservations in AccordDB LG Root H 0 Default pag sB Default Audio Start Immediatly Product Management Start Immediately Start Start Sales 6 New Participant New Participant Production 3 QA 4 Copy As Copy As iy sitet PM 5 FO Default Attending Default Attending w Print Template Print Template Cut Ctrl x Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Ctrl C Paste Ctrl y Ctrl y Paste As Ctrl P Paste 4s GEER Delete Del Delete Del Properties Properties Ifyou are connected to more than one MCU an arrow appears next to Start Immediately option Click the arrow to display the list of MCUs and then click the name of the MCU to use for running the conference Alternatively click Start to schedule a conference to start now while modifying its properties such as name duration or passwords or to schedule the conference to start later Reservations The conference is started and is added to the On Going Conference list If you have scheduled the conference to start later it will appear in
11. b Type the new name for the participant and then click OK The participant is copied under the new name to the On Going Conference reservation or Reservation template 4 27 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Muting Dial In Participants Upon Connection You can set a conference to automatically mute all dial in participants that were not defined prior to or during the On Going Conference This feature referred to as the Mute Meet Me Parties feature can be enabled during conference scheduling or during the On Going Conference Meet Me per Conference or Entry Queue Access conference This option is applicable to undefined participants connecting to a Meeting Room ls This feature does not apply to standard pre defined dial in participants During an On Going Conference this feature can be enabled or cancelled in one of the following methods e From the conference right click menu e From the Conference Properties dialog box e From the chairperson DTMF input device remote control telephone pressing the appropriate DTMF code default code for enabling this feature is 86 and for cancelling it 86 To enable Mute Meet Me Parties from the Conference right click menu 1 Expand the On Going Conferences list 2 Right click the icon of the conference whose dial in participants connecting to the conference are to be muted and then click Mute Meet Me Parties ai
12. Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants For Gatekeeper functionality and interoperability see the Administrator s Guide Chapter 3 Defining a H 323 Network Service The MGC Manager determines the conference to which the participant is assigned according to the participant s alias or IP address defined for the participant in the conference Endpoint IP Endpoint IP 196 123 38 129 196 123 38 146 Alias 259 ae Ao Alias 256 IP 172 22 138 146 Alias 146 Dials 146 Dials 146 Conference1 IP Card 1 MCU Gatekeeper Conference2 IP Card 2 IP 172 22 138 148 Dials 148 Alias 148 Endpoint IP 172 123 12 89 Alias 268 Figure 2 5 H 323 Participant simple dial in using the IP card alias H 323 Advanced Dial in In this mode the participant enters a dialing string that is the IP Network Service Prefix Usually one IP Network Service is defined for all the IP cards installed in the MCU The IP Network Service is registered with the gatekeeper using a prefix The prefix is defined using E 164 format i e 0 9 digits and This Network Service prefix is also entered in the IP Network Service Properties H 323 dialog box The Network Service prefix is given to the participants as the dial in number When the participants dial in the call arrives at the gatekeeper The gatekeeper locates the MCU and tries to allocate a port from the first free IP card If the resource is a
13. Clear Q amp A lt Alt gt lt C gt Clears the selected participants listed in the Queue Q amp A queue Move lt F5 gt Enables the operator to move the attended in attended participant to a selected conference queue dialog Attended Participant dialog box Next lt F6 gt Enables the operator to attend to the next in attended participant in line Attended Participant dialog queue dialog box Join to lt F10 gt Enables the operator to temporarily join an Conference On Going Conference for example for short announcements or assistance End Join lt F11 gt Enables the operator to return to the Operation Operator Conference Attend Next lt F12 gt Moves the next participant in line from the Party Participants Queue to the Operator Conference for assistance Context Help lt Shift gt lt F1 gt Opens the relevant Help topic 1 9 Chapter 1 VoicePlus Overview Audio Look amp Feel The MGC Manager application that is used for Audio Only conferencing can be set to the Audio Look amp Feel mode to hide all video associated functions and display only Audio Only parameters To set the MGC Manager to Audio Look amp Feel 1 On the Options menu click Audio Look amp Feel Options Window Help Communication Conf Alert Ftp Configurations Beep on faults Drag confirmation Set Reservation Creator v Enable Crash Dump monitor dialog Audio Look amp Feel Monitor All Configure Indications
14. Indicates the remaining number of attempts the system makes to reach disconnected participants and connect them to the conference You set this parameter in the Options menu Communication option Once the participant connects to the conference the number of retries is set to 0 Media Identifies the participant s media types Audio and Data Member Channels Identifies the number of channels that are used for connecting this participant Note This parameter is not displayed for H 323 participants Aggregation Displays the aggregation method of the channels that are used for connecting this participant H 221 Bonding or Multi Rate Note This parameter is not displayed for H 323 participants The participant ID as assigned by the system Sync Loss For ISDN ATM MPI participants indicates the general Count synchronization status R indicates the endpoint remote status while L indicates the MCU status A dash indicates that there is no sync loss problem while numbers indicate the number of times that the sync loss problem occurred at the remote or the local site 3 13 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences 3 14 Table 3 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns Continued Column nE ROM eon Inet Desoipton Disconnec tion Cause Q amp A Position Q amp A Waiting Last Vote Sub Conference Name Displays the disconnection cause for a participant who is disconnected from the conferen
15. Meet Me Per Cont Recording p General Settings F Ene I Enable IVA Service Msg Service Name Fiero I OnHold I Enable Invite FE SilencelT Before FistJoin 5 Min After Last Quit M Min Media Settings Audio Alg 56 G711 lt lt Basic 4 29 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 4 30 Advanced gt gt button to display all fields LS If only a few fields are displayed in the General Settings box click the Select the Mute Meet Me parties check box Click OK From this point on all incoming parties are automatically muted by the MCU and the appropriate icon is displayed in the Audio column Participants remain muted until you manually unmute them To cancel Mute Meet Me Parties from the Conference Properties dialog box 1 In the Monitor pane Status pane or Browser pane right click the conference icon and then click Properties The Conference Properties dialog box opens Click the Settings tab The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Clear the Mute Meet Me parties check box and then click OK MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Adding Remarks During an On Going Conference In the Conference Properties General dialog box you can add and save any text for example conference information or a comment during the conference setup or during the On Going Confer
16. T1 CAS participants are supported only with the Audio 12 24 Audio 24 48 and Audio 48 96 cards It is not possible to mix an ISDN Network Service and a T1 CAS Network Service on the same Net 2 Net 4 Net 8 Network Interface module Therefore to run both ISDN and T1 CAS conferences simultaneously you must install two separate the Net 2 Net 4 Net 8 cards IP or IP cards are required to run conferences that include VoIP participants IP cards from version 4 23 or higher are required for conferences that include SIP participants IP 12 or 24 cards are sufficient for H 323 only conferences The VTX 1000 connection is supported with the Audio 12 24 Audio 24 48 and Audio 48 96 cards and the MGC 25 2 6 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Participant Roles Conference participants can have different functions a standard participant a chairperson or an operator Standard participant takes part in the conference performing basic operations via the telephone using the touch tone signals DTMF codes Participants can control their broadcasting and listening volume mute or unmute their line request operator s assistance invite new participants to the conference vote and ask questions The functions that participants can perform are defined in the IVR Service In some cases a standard participant can have the same privileges as the chairperson Chairperson takes part in the conference but is also the meeti
17. 02 00 00 55 4258 1719 Bs sales OK 02 00 00 68 22222 11111 1719 GBS transitions OK 02 00 00 70 3077 9215179 986578 342654 1719 This view enables you to easily retrieve the dial in numbers and the Numeric IDs assigned to the Entry Queue This is especially useful when the dial in numbers and Numeric IDs were automatically allocated by the system 5 19 Chapter 5 Meeting Rooms and Entry Queues Dialing in to an Entry Queue 5 20 PSTN Phone Cellular Phone ISDN T1 CAS endpoint participants To access the Entry Queue from a PSTN phone cellular phone or an ISDN endpoint or Video endpoint connecting as Audio Only participants can use the dial in number assigned to the Entry Queue H 323 Participant H 323 participants connect to an Entry Queue by dialing the H 323 Network Service Prefix and the Entry Queue Numeric ID or name H 323 Network Service Prefix EQ Numeric ID For example if the H 323 Network Service prefix is 100 the Entry Queue Numeric ID is 1122 and the Entry Queue name is POLYCOM the participant dials 1001122 or 1OOPOLYCOM Upon connection to the Entry Queue they are routed to the destination conference in the same way as ISDN PSTN T1 CAS participants MCU Dials 100POLYCOM Conference or 1001122 1122 1001122 Gatekeeper ey S SRG H 323 Network 1122 IP Address of MCU card Service 1122 Prefix 100 Conference Training Dials 1001122 ID 2727 H 323 participants can also bypass t
18. Advanced f Connection Infot Connection Info2 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Connection Into2 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Connection Time Connection Time Nov 25 2003 09 19 16 AM Nov 25 2003 09 23 25 AM Disconnection Time Disconnection Time l Connection Retries Left Connection Retries Left E Mute By Operator g r Attending J Audio A Attending I Oper Participant Mote 2yParticinant Talore By Particinap N I Audio IF Audio FE Attending Mute By MCU I Attending Mure By MCU Participant Attending State Fi Audio Participant Attending State I Audio On Hold On Hold r Gatekeeper Status R Eri r Gatekeeper State aguestod anata Pe 128 KBPS Admitted Allocated C DRAG 128 KBPS LEN Request Info Interval I Gatekeeper routed 0 Sec OK Cancel Apr ISDN Telephone Participant IP Participant Connection Info2 Properties Connection Info2 Properties b Click the Connection Info2 tab The Participant s Properties Connection Info2 dialog box opens c Inthe Mute By Operator box check the Audio option and then click OK The dialog box closes and muting takes effect The Muted Participant icon appears in the Audio column in the Monitor and Status panes To un mute the audio using this method clear the Mute By Operator Audio check box 4 19 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Enabling Disabling Auto Gain Control AGC 4 20 Endpoints and phones vary in the types
19. Automatic Monitoring of Conferences wee eee eeeeeeees 3 19 Secure Conference Mode 00 ec eeeeeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeaees 3 19 Audio TOMES siessicssess iesdecsesaed cae canccinsianesesiantasesuad viiveansdeeatveraeesthiaae 3 21 Noisy Line Detection Mechanism and Automatic Muting 3 22 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Participants QUCUC ieee ceeeeeeeeeeeeseesecetaecseeseeeseeaseesesetaeeeeeaee 3 23 Conference Level Monitoring eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeseeaeeeeeaees 3 23 Participant Level Monitoring oo eee eee cee cee ceeceeceeeeeeseeaeeeeeaees 3 27 Monitoring ISDN Telephone Participants 00 0 0 eee 3 28 Checking the Status of VoIP Participants eeeeeeeeeee 3 38 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 4 1 Management Functions Overview 0 cesses cseceseeseeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeaes 4 2 Participant and Conference Level Operations cece 4 3 Participant Level Operations 0 00 0 eee eesceseeeeeeeeeecsseeeeeeeaeeeseeeeaes 4 4 Making Dial Out Connections cece eee eeeeseeseeeeeeeaeeeeeees 4 4 Changing Participant Connection Types Dial In Dial Out 4 5 Disconnecting Participants from Conferences 0 0 4 6 Naming Undefined Dial in Participants 000 eee eee 4 8 Changing the Disconnected Participant s Properties 4 10 Moving a Participant from one Conference to Another 4 11 Designating an Exclusive Speaker o eee eeee
20. Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Management Functions Overview The MGC Manager operator performs different roles during attended and unattended conferences Attended Conferences On Going attended conferences require an active Operator conference to run on the same MCU as the attended conference In attended conferences participants accessing an Entry Queue or an IVR queue are moved to the Participants Queue where they wait for the operator to assist them The operator s role during this stage is to use the Participants Queue management tools to move the participants from the Participants Queue to the destination conference During an On Going Conference the operator can take part in the conference and perform various tasks for example assist participants privately conduct a voting session manage a Question and Answer session place participants on hold and lock the conference to dial in participants For a detailed description of Attended Conferencing see Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing on page 7 1 Unattended Conferences In unattended conferences participants use DTMF codes in response to menu driven voice prompts and in this way are guided to the conference Unless there is a problem in the connection or the participant did not enter the correct conference Numeric ID or password operator intervention is not required In unattended conferences the operator usually leaves the management of the c
21. Configure Shortcuts Stop Current Indication Repeating Configure Proxy Settings Open Diagnostic tool Mark Faulty Participants in Red A check mark appears next to Audio Look amp Feel indicating that this mode is active All video related functions and dialog boxes are hidden 2 Click this feature again to cancel the Audio Look amp Feel mode Restart the MGC Manager application MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Audio Only Conferences The MGC Manager provides various methods to set up and schedule conferences Each method is represented in the MCU tree by a name and an icon After the scheduling method is determined you must select a conference type and determine how the participants connect to the conference Participants can connect to the conference by an accessing method such as Entry Queue conference IVR Queue or directly and by the conferencing service level i e operator attended or unattended conferencing When user s move from one conference to another they maintain the resources as allocated to them A VTX 1000 user who moves from a VTX enabled conference to a VTX disabled conference is able to move back to the VTX enabled conference and maintain the wide band connection as initially allocated Reservation Templates A Reservation template contains a partial or complete definition of a single conference It is used to run a series of conferences that use the same parameters such as
22. IP ISDN ATM MPI MCU Product Management F Enyi Meet h m Conference Type r Media G Stan Audio Remarks Update Remark Remarks History zi 3 23 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences 3 24 In an On Going Conference two new tabs appear in the Conference Properties dialog box that were not applicable during the conference definition Scheduler On Going State You can view the conference general parameters and if remarks have been entered review the remarks history Click the Scheduler tab to view the date and time at which the conference had started and to view the ending time that was scheduled for the conference The Conference Properties Scheduler dialog box opens Polycom Properties Product Management 3 x Soner Eei Jsi Participants Ongoing State Meet Me Per Cont Recording Ending Date EE January 2005 gt Sun Mon Ending Time a 2 3 3 10 16 17 23 24 3 05 51 PM Jan 13 2005 Cancel Apply Help To shorten or extend the conference you can adjust the conference ending date and time 3 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Click the Ongoing State tab to view information about the conference status The Conference Properties Ongoing State dialog box opens Polycom Properties Product Management x General Scheduler Settings Participar s Ongo
23. Join button The operator returns to the Operator conference 7 33 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing Managing Attended Participants from the Browser Status and Monitor Panes The same operations that can be performed in the Participants Queue Window can also be performed when selecting participants in the Browser Status and Monitor panes using the following methods e Using the participant right click menu e Using the Attended Participant toolbar e Using Shortcut keys e Using drag and drop Selecting the Participants to Manage The participants can be selected from the following places Browser Status and Monitor pane On Going Conference list MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 14 10x File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help aaeeea aoea ouaaa Field 6 Participant Numbers Field 7 Field WD Disconnected 172 22 172 74 H323 Bee viarout 4i o zia Field 9 WG De Connected 172 22 172 13 H323 e Dial out qi o E wec 2s 3r O o De Connected 79320 ison BeB oaout Qi o E i Product Management Major MCU Configuration ER on Going Canferences 3 Taw B Bi budget Alan BE donald Connection Type Audio Gig Debbie On Going Gateway Sessions Eg participants Queue 2 Karen budget Donald budget Connection Network Youdget Product 2 Connected Not Full Participant Nu
24. Monitor Monitor Filter New Participant F8 Terminate Del Copy Conf CtrHC Paste Participant Cry Paste Participant As CtrHP Next Questioner Clear Q amp A Lock Conference Mute Meet Me parties On Hold ating Join to Conference Fig Print Reservation Data Properties 4 28 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition From this point on all incoming parties are automatically muted by the MCU and the appropriate icon is displayed in the Audio column Participants remain muted until you manually unmute them To cancel Mute Meet Me Parties from the Conference right click menu When the Mute Meet Me Parties option is cancelled undefined participants who dial in are not muted However the participants who were previously muted by the MCU using this feature are not automatically unmuted when this option is cancelled 1 Expand the On Going Conferences list 2 Right click the icon of the conference for which you want to cancel the Mute Meet Me Parties operation and then click Unmute Meet Me Parties To enable Mute Meet Me Parties from the Conference Properties dialog box 1 Inthe Monitor pane Status pane or Browser pane right click the conference icon and then click Properties 2 Click the Settings tab The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Planning Properties Product Management x General Scheduler Settings Participants Ongoing State
25. Select the required solution by clicking the appropriate button Include selected participants and schedule Select this option to allow the system to ignore the found conflict information and to schedule the conference Back to reservation Select this option to return to the current conference definition without scheduling the conference and to modify the required parameters or select other participants Cancel scheduling Select this option to cancel the current conference definition and exit the conference definition mode The window closes and the selected action is applied 2 39 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants Listing On Going Conferences 2 40 In the On Going Conferences list you can view all conferences that are currently running To view the On Going Conferences 1 Expand the MCU tree and then expand the On Going Conferences tree H To On Going Conferences 2 R HG ACCORD H Demo The number of On Going Conferences appears between brackets next to the On Going Conferences icon and the conferences that are currently running are listed below Each conference is identified by its name and an icon indicating its type and general status On first entry or if no conferences are running the On Going Conferences list is empty Additional information regarding the On Going Conferences can be viewed in the Status pane MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus E
26. Turn Off AGC Properties The participant icon changes to indicate that the participant was added to the Q amp A queue aS On Going Conferences 2 ae ACCORD Lynne Demo a8 Demo EQ_952 000 2A Demo EQ_954 000 4 38 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition In addition the Monitor table displays detailed information Name Status Connection Network Phone IP_ Connection Type Syne Audio Q amp A position Q amp A Waiting Time BE accoro Alpha 06 ID 4911 Single Particip 3 Lynne O connected 99251284 Reb Dial out ok qi Poyon Alpha 06 ID 4915 3 Connected 2 Debbie D connected 172 22 132 6 Bes Dial out ok i 00 18 28 2 Frank P Connected 79320 a Dial out ok qi 00 17 37 2 Michelle Connected 172 22 132 112 ga Dial out ok qi 00 17 31 The QA Position column shows the order of the participants who have requested to ask a question in the Q amp A queue The QA Waiting Time column displays the length of time the participant has been waiting in the Q amp A queue Note that in the above figure the Q amp A columns were moved to the left By default these columns are located on the right of the Monitor pane and you need to use the scrolling arrows to display them 4 39 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 4 40 Changing Participant s Position in Q amp A Queue You can change the position of any participant in the Q amp A queue
27. at the MCU s rear panel It is used to playback music or recorded messages from an external device such as a tape or CD player The music is played when the conference is placed on hold or while waiting in the Participants Queue for the Operator s assistance This card is optional in the MGC 50 MGC 100 and is embedded in the MGC 25 Audio File Conversion The MGC Manager is shipped with a set of default audio wav and acc message files in English and Spanish These files can be used with the default IVR and Entry Queue Message Services installed with the MCU software or to create new services Conversion of audio files to the format that is recognized by the Polycom MCU is necessary when you record custom sets of voice prompts and messages The audio files must be converted into the MGC internal format aca before they are downloaded to the MCU unit for use in IVR Message Services Therefore you should prepare the audio files before defining the IVR software module properties and IVR and Entry Queue Message Services The Audio conversion tool is described in the MGC Manager Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 6 9 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services Defining IVR Software Module Properties The audio messages and prompts played to participants can be recorded in different languages You can create IVR Message Services and Entry Queue Services for different languages and assign them to different conferences allowing partici
28. e The participant requests Operator s Assistance during the On Going Conference e The participant is placed on hold The Participants Queue provides robust tools for the operator to manage participants waiting for assistance The Participants Queue is organized in one list Participants waiting in the Participants Queue can be listed in the Status pane or in a separate window This enables you to list the On Going Conferences in the Status pane while assisting the participants waiting in the Participants Queue The Participants Queue management options are available only if an Operator conference is active and running on the MCU The main working tool is the Attended Participant dialog box that opens when a participant is being attended by the operator This dialog box enables the operator to enter the participant name general information indicate the participant status VIP yes no change the listening or broadcasting volume and move the participant to the destination conference Home conference The Attended Participant dialog box also provides tools to easily search filter the list of On Going Conferences for the appropriate destination conference create a new On Going Conference start an existing Meeting Room and place a participant on hold When moving the participant to the destination conference the next participant waiting in the Participants Queue can be automatically moved to the Operator conference to the Attended stage s
29. log into the database 2 Inthe MGC Manager window from the Filter toolbar in the Filter list select New Filter PARTICIPANTS QUEUE FILTER DELETE FILTER New Filter ba lj New Filter 7 15 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing 3 Click the Participants Queue Filter button 4 Enter the Filter name to save it in the database for future use Define the filtering options You can select from the listed statuses of participants to be monitored or the participants who dialed the indicated dial in numbers 7 16 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition You can define the following filtering parameters Table 7 5 Participants Queue Filter Options Filter Name Enter the name of the Filter If you are modifying the parameters of an existing filter enter a new name to modify the filter name Participant Status in Participants Queue Help Request Select this check box to display participants who have requested help in the Participants Queue window Waiting for Select this check box to display participants who are Operator waiting for the Operator Assistance because they Assistance failed to enter the correct conference numeric ID Conference or Chairperson password or because they need to be connected to the conference as the Entry Queue Service or IVR Service is set to attended mode On Hold Select this check box to display
30. ode New voting session To start a new voting session press star eight one Cancel voting session To cancel the voting session press pound eight one Ask a question Everyone To ask a question press star two two Cancel my question Everyone To cancel a question press pound two two 82 Chairperson 82 22 22 Next in line question 23 Chairperson 23 24 4 1 Chairperson To let the next questioner ask a question press star two three End current question To terminate the current question press pound two three Cancel all questions Chairperson To cancel all questions press star two four Dial out to invitee Chairperson To dial out to invitee press star four Admit invitee and continue dial out Chairperson To admit an invitee and continue dial out press star submenu one Disconnect invitee and continue dial out 2 Chairperson To disconnect an invitee and continue dial out press submenu star two Chairperson Admit invitee and return to conference 3 Chairperson To admit an invitee and return to the conference submenu press star three Disconnect invitee amp return to conference 4 Chairperson To disconnect an invitee amp return to conference press submenu star four Play Menu Everyone To play a new menu press star eight three 4 65 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Table 4 4 DTMF Operations Performed Durin
31. 0 18 ENE File Edt View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help eni ger n amli a St leE 9 fea ay f 5 522 iy a my wes AAA a dS wa lle es E a 2 E Wye Sb b rd E i s gig a r P coy wr SAPPA A p All X JAE n AL E Alpha 14 Normal Name Status Connection Network PhonelIP_ Audio Video Connection Ty EEA mcu configuration iw On Going Conferences 1 DIAL IN001 A connected M1001 1001 P i Bab Dialin B Een Test_VSW_128_60P 8 DIAL INOO2 gt Connected M1002 1002 P i Bat Dial in 3 j FA pial DIAL IN001 ora A connected M 1003 1003 P if Z Dialin DIAL IN002 a DIAL IN004 i Connected M 1004 1004 P i Bab Dial in 8 DIAL IN003 DIAL IN005 a connected M1005 1005 P il oe Dial in 5 orano om mo P Connected M 1006 1006 P il 82 Dialin rf DIAL INOOS a DIAL INOO7 D connected M 1007 1007 P il Bat Dial in 8 DIAL IN006 DIAL INOOB F Connected m1008 1008 P i i Dial in DIAL IN007 DIAL IN009 I connected M 1009 1009 P if Bab Dial in Q nanos DIAL IN010 I connected M1010 1010 P Qi Bak iain zl orat moo f In addition you can enable the SilenceIT option to automatically mute the audio participants who are identified as having a noisy line SilenceIT uses an algorithm that detects continued background music or other noise that is not in the range of human speech SilenceIT can be applied to Audio parti
32. 10 Displays the number of participants currently Total Parties waiting participants in the Q amp A queue and the total number of participants connected to the Move participant to F Moves the participant to the first position in the first position in Q amp A Q amp A queue enabling this participant to Q 2 Remove Participant 2 Removes a participant from the Q amp A queue from Q amp A KA 2 2 s a conference Adding Questioners to the Q amp A Queues Participants can be added as questioners to the Q amp A queue using one of the following options e Questioners are added to the Q amp A queue once they press the appropriate DTMF code on their DTMF input device default DTMF code is 22 An appropriate audio message is played to confirm the participant addition to the Q amp A queue 4 37 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences e Questioners can also be added to the queue manually from the MGC Manager application In the Browser Status or Monitor panes right click the icon of the participant to add to the queue 2 mA Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Move Participant gt Copy Participant Ctrl C Cut Ctrl x Delete Del Exclusive Speaker Q amp A Management ve Participant to First Position in Change to Chairperson Participant to Last Positior attene F2 cara M Participant Position Up in Q A CuS Move Participant Position Down in O84 To Home Conf F3 Mute Audio Ctrl M
33. 6 17 Defining a New IVR Message Service 0 cece eeeeeseeeeeeeees 6 17 Listing IVR Message Services cceeeesseeeeeeseesseeceseeseeseeseees 6 37 Setting an IVR Message Service as Default 0 eee 6 38 Modifying IVR Message Service Properties eee eee 6 39 Assigning IVR Services to Conferences 0 0 eeeeeeeseeseeeeeeees 6 40 Defining a New Entry Queue Message Service eee eeeeeees 6 41 Assigning Entry Queue Services to an Entry Queue 6 48 Connecting to a Conference from an Entry Queue ou 6 49 Viewing the Audio Messages Status 0 0 ce ceeseeseeseeseeeeeseteeeeeeeees 6 50 Printing VR DTME Codes eeeeseceeeeseseseeeeaeeaeseseaeeaeeseeaee 6 52 Default IVR Prompts and Messages ce eceseeeeeseeseeeeeseeseeeeeeees 6 54 Fine Tuning the SilenceIT Algorithm ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 63 Attended Conferencing 2eese eee e eee eens 7 1 Requirements for an Attended Conference 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 3 Defining an Operator Conference 0 eee eee eee eeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaes 7 5 Setting the Participants Connection to the Conference to Attended Mode sisinio is ai ea e E NOEN EINA NN Eia ie 7 9 Table of Contents Setting the Entry Queue to Attended Mode eee eects 7 9 Setting the Conference Connection to Attended Mode 7 10 Participants Queue Management 0 00 0 eee eee cee ceeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeees 7 11 Listing Participants in the Participants Queue Window
34. Attended state Participant The status of the Attended participant Attending State e Attended The participant is being assisted by the operator in an Operator Conference e On Hold The participant was placed on hold and hears background music Mute By When checked indicates that the participant s audio Operator channel was muted by the operator Mute By When checked indicates that the audio channel was Participant muted by the participant Mute By MCU When checked indicates that the participant s audio channel was automatically muted by the MCU upon connection to the conference or when the Exclusive Speaker mode was enabled Note This option is activated when the Mute Incoming Parties option is checked in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box If required modify the following parameters mute the participant by checking the Mute By Operator button 4 To view the MCU resources used to handle the participant click the Resource Details tab 3 33 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences The Participant Properties Resource Details dialog box opens Planning Dept 1 Properties Identification Advanced Connection Infol Connection Info2 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Resource Details Resource T Board Id UnitId_ Allocated Connection Id None None NO None UDIO CODEC None None NO None UDIO BRIDGE None None NO None DEO None None NO None 120 BRIDGE None
35. Audio Only Conference 1 In the Browser pane expand the MCU tree 2 Right click the On Going Conferences icon and then click New Conference Product Management Normal Ra MCU Configuration iE Cards aa Connections aN IVR Msg Services E Network Services Operators ics Profiles aie Recording Links On Going Conferences 0 New Conference New Operator Conference H H A Print All MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition The Conference Properties dialog box opens allowing you to define the various conference parameters Properties Product Management k xj General Settings Patticipants Recording f Name Conf Entry Password Duration 2 00 Web Chairperson Password Billing Numeric ID MCU Product Management User Defined 1 I Entry Queue Access User Defined 2 I Meet Me Per Cont User Defined Conference Type Media r Supported Network Standard Audio CIP Meeting Room Video Audio IPLISDN ATM MPI Operator Remarks Remarks History Cancel Apply Help When defining a Standard conference the Properties dialog box shows four setup tabs The Meet Me Per Conference tab is displayed when defining Meeting Rooms and Meet Me Per conferences All the properties of an On Going audio conference are logically grouped in these setup tabs General lets you define t
36. Dial in Sets the participants Connection Type to Dial out New lt F8 gt Adds a new participant to the On Going Participant Conference reservation or Meeting Room Connect lt Ctrl gt lt R gt Connects or reconnects a participant to an Participant lt Ctrl gt lt T gt On Going Conference Disconnect Disconnects a participant from the On Going Participant Conference Note To select several participants use the standard Windows conventions Mute Audio lt Ctrl gt lt M gt Mutes the participant s audio channel UnMute lt Ctrl gt lt U gt Unmutes the participant s audio channel Audio Refresh lt F9 gt Refreshes the database Database Next lt Alt gt lt N gt During a Q amp A session allows the operator to Questioner let the next participant in the Q amp A queue ask the question 1 8 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 1 1 VoicePlus Commands Shortcut Keys Continued Paste Entry lt Cirl gt lt E gt Used to modify Entry Queue properties or Queue As name when pasting the selected entry queue from the clipboard to the Meeting Rooms amp Entry Queues list Opens the Entry Queue Properties dialog box Attend lt F2 gt Moves the participant to the Operator Conference for assistance To Home lt F3 gt Moves the participant from the Operator to Conference the destination Home conference Hold lt F4 gt Enables the operator to place the attended participant on hold
37. Going Conference Properties dialog box If you modify any parameters click Apply in the relevant tab 3 26 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Participant Level Monitoring In addition to the information that appears in the Status and the Monitor panes you can also view the connection parameters and status of each of the conference participants This feature is especially useful if there is a problem during the connection of the participant to the conference Meet Me dial in participants those who were not defined by the scheduler prior or during the conference are automatically named by the system These names are displayed next to the participant icon The name is composed of the Entry Queue or On Going Conference name and a number Beco Demo_869 000 ve M925192 Bat Dial in a EQ Demo_871 000 Le ihe ab Dial in M 925192 Bak Dial in g 9054631645 Qb Dial out o Using the Participant Properties dialog box you can verify the properties of the ISDN or VoIP participant who is connected to a conference The Identification Advanced Connection Infol Connection Info2 Resource Details Disconnection Cause H 221 or another used protocol tabs are only displayed during an On Going Conference These tabs contain information about the participant status while the conference is running and are used mainly to monitor the participant when a connection problem occurs For a detailed description of participant
38. Going Conference only if the participant is disconnected see Chapter 4 Changing the Disconnected Participant s Properties on page 4 10 For description of the IP participant definition see Chapter 2 Defining New On Going Audio Conferences on page 2 14 2 Click the Connection Info1 tab The Participant Properties Connection Infol dialog box opens 3 To view detailed connection information per channel expand the dialog box by clicking Channel Info 3 39 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences The Channel Info pane opens Alan Properties Identification Advanced Connection Infot Connection Info2 H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Participant State Audio out Channel Info fi FECC pameca MCU Address 172 22 188 41 49198 Dis t a Patty Address 1722217274 3230 Channels Status Channel Faulty BitRate Packet Loss Fraction Loss Pe A Media Info Z H225 Field Value Z H245 Algorithm g711Ulaw64k Frame Per Pa 40 pL a a Channel index 799 Pj Audio oul 0 O Video in O Video out O Content in RTP Statistics O Content Accumu Interval O 1120 in y XENI IP a m E lt lt Channel Info Syne Counters Status Channel Source Position Protocol sync loss Video oo La I FECC Token I Content Token Cancel The following information i
39. II Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Note e You cannot select the Ad Hoc option if no Profile is defined in the system The Ad Hoc Entry Queue can also be used for access to standard conference In that case the Target Conference Settings defined in the Entry Queue are used for connecting participants to the Entry Queue Select the profile to be used for the definition of the target conference in Ad Hoc conferencing Note For more details about Profile definition see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 3 Profiles e Audio Only Select this option for an Audio Only Entry Queue If Audio Look amp Feel mode is selected it is the default setting IP Only Select this option to allow only VoIP participants to connect to this Entry Queue Encryption applicable with IP Only Select this option to enable only encrypted participants to connect to the Entry Queue MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 5 4 Audio Only Entry Queue Properties Continued Target Audio Alg If IP Only is selected you can select the Conference audio algorithm to use for the VoIP participants Settings connecting to the Entry Queue This must be the same audio algorithm used in the target conference Entry Queue Dial Lists the numbers to be dialed by the PSTN ISDN T1 in Numbers CAS dial in participants connecting to the Entry Queue This table is disa
40. New Participant F8 Terminate Del Copy Conf Ctrl C Girly Ctrl P Lock Conference Mute Meet Me parties On Hold Voting Join to Conference F10 Print Reservation Data Properties The conference details appear in the Monitor pane Information is displayed in table form Each row represents a conference or a participant and each column represents a status item that is being monitored You can adjust both the columns and the rows in the Monitor and the Status pane tables to suit your monitoring priorities MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition e To modify the order of columns select and drag the column labels to the desired location e To sort items in a column click a column heading once for descending order and click again to sort the items in ascending order e The Conference Name Status Phone Connection Type and Retries Left fields appear in both the Status and Monitor pane Table 3 2 describes the Monitor pane columns Table 3 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns Column Description Name j Name The name of the On Going Conference or participant and an icon indicating the conference and participant type and status Conference Indicators E R Audio Only conference Operator Conference This type of conference can be run on an Audio Only MCU Voice Plus or on a unified MCU Audio only Allows the operator and a single participant to talk in a side
41. None NO None y320 CODEC None None NO None P None None NO None S Net Resource Details Channel Board id Unitid Portid Allocated Connection id 1 None None None NO None SS The following information is displayed for the connected participant Table 3 11 ISDN Participant Properties Resource Details Resource Details Displays information about MCU modules used to handle the participant The following parameters are displayed 3 34 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 3 11 ISDN Participant Properties Resource Details Continued Resource Type The type of the conference resource installed in the MCU MUX The MUX card Not relevant to Audio Only participant Audio Codec The audio encoding decoding port Audio Bridge The Audio Bridge that mixes the audio signal received from various ports Applicable only to Video participants using the Standard Audio card to connect to the conference T120 Codec Not relevant to Audio Only participant T120 Bridge Not relevant to Audio Only participant Video Not applicable to Audio Only IP Applicable to H 323 and SIP participants Board ID The number of the slot where the card containing the resource that is used to run the conference and handle the participant is installed Unit ID The unit number on the card used to handle the participant in the conference Allocated Indicates whether the MCU resources listed in the
42. On Going Conferences list in the Browser pane to display the home conference icon and the destination conference icon 2 Drag the icon of participant from the home conference and drop it on the target conference icon To move participants using the right click menu 1 Inthe Browser pane expand the participant list of the source conference Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 2 Right click the icon of the participant to move click Move Participant to open the list of active conferences and then click the name of the destination conference sales_ 001 Disconnect Particip Polycom Ctrlex Delete Del Exclusive Speaker Q amp A Operations gt Change to Chairperson Attend F2 Hold To Home GConf Mute Audio Ctrl M Block Audio Turn OFF AGC Properties The participant is transferred to the selected destination conference Designating an Exclusive Speaker During On Going Conferences you can designate one participant as the conference lecturer speaker while all other participants are automatically muted so as not to interrupt the lecture Alternatively chairpersons can designate themselves as the Exclusive Speaker for the conference using the appropriate DTMF code the default code is 5 or cancel the Exclusive Speaker mode default DTMF code is 5 The operator can unmute participants who were muted by the MCU or cancel the Exclusive Speaker mode The c
43. Pre defined Participants list c Inthe Pre defined Participants list select the participants to add to the conference and click the Add 2 button Recording This dialog box is used to enable recording the audio channel of the conference It is intended for use with the external recording systems like the ReadiRecorder To enable recording for an On Going Conference 1 Click the Recording tab The Recording dialog box opens Sales Q1 Properties Product Management 2 Define the following parameters to record the audio channel of the conference 2 35 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants Table 2 4 Conference Properties Recording Enable Recording Select this option to enable recording Recording Link If you enabled recording select the required Name Recording Link from the list of the defined links If left blank the default recording link will be used The recording link defines the connection parameters between the conference and the recording system Note To view the Recording Links defined for the MCU double click Recording Links under the MCU Configuration icon Start Recording Select when to start recording the conference e Immediately when the conference starts even if no participant is connected Upon Request the recording starts when the chairperson sends the appropriate request by DTMF codes or by the MGC Manager operator For more in
44. Properties dialog box lists the currently defined languages xl Supported Languages Add Message File cancel button 3 To add anew language click the plus The Custom Language dialog box opens Custom language x New Language New Language fs PANISH ce In the New Language field enter the name of the language to include in the Supported Languages list LS The language name cannot include a period 4 Click OK The new language is added to the JVR Properties dialog box To download Audio Message files Optional You can download the Audio Message files during the definition of the IVR Message Service or Entry Queue Service In that case you may skip the following steps 5 Inthe IVR Properties dialog box click the Add Message File button 6 11 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services 6 12 The Add Message File dialog box opens xl Path Generation Message Language Message Category Message Type instal to CEEE Conference Password 7 Request Password z Download Fie The audio files are downloaded to the MGC unit one at a time according to the selected category and type The following steps describe selecting a single Message Type in one of the Message Categories for which the audio file will be downloaded downloaded separately when the appropriate message Language Category and Ly You can download several aud
45. Queue a Select the service name or phone number to delete b Click the minus a button in the Entry Queue dialog box The service name and its phone numbers are deleted 5 Click OK to complete the Entry Queue definition Entry Queue is added to the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factory list Usually only a limited number of Entry Queues are defined in order to save dial in numbers MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Listing Entry Queues To view the list of Entry Queues in the Browser pane In the Browser pane of the main window expand the MCU tree and then expand the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories tree The Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories currently defined for the MCU are listed with the total number displayed in brackets next to the icon T On Going Conferences 0 d Participants Queue 0 Reservations 0 i Meeting Rooms amp Entry Queues 9 Entry Queue The Entry Queues and Meeting Rooms are listed in the Status pane To view the list of Entry Queues in the Status pane Click the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories icon The Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories are listed in the Status pane Name Status Duration 1D Numeric 1d Dial in Number Entry Password Chair Password H323 Service Prefix te B33 123 OK 02 00 00 44 2603 9215184 12345 1111 1719 a MR 1 OK 02 00 00 54 3496 9215189 021228 021477 1719 esm 2 O K
46. Resource Type column are allocated to the conference Connection ID The number identifying participant s connection Net Resources Displays information about the network interface module used to run the conference and handle the participant Channel The participant s channel number Board ID The number of the slot in which the card containing the resource that is used to run the conference and handle the participant is installed Unit ID The span used to handle the participant in conference The port number on the Network card allocated to the participant 3 35 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences Table 3 11 ISDN Participant Properties Resource Details Continued Allocated Indicates whether the Network card installed in the MCU is used to run the conference Connection ID The number identifying participant s connection 5 If the participant is disconnected from the conference click the Disconnection Cause tab to display the cause The Participant Properties Disconnection Cause dialog box opens Planning Dept 1 Properties Identification Advanced Connection Infot Connection Info2 H221 Disconnection Cause Resource Details r Call Disconnection Reason Operator Disconnect No Net Connection Bad H243 Connection Participant Hang Up Resource Defficiency Security Failure Operator name Po LYCOM OK Cancel Apply 3 36 MGC Ma
47. Service to record the participants name and play it back when entering and leaving a conference The purpose of Roll Call is to ensure that all required participants are present and to identify the participants to one another Participants connecting to the conference are asked to record their names The system records the names and plays the recorded names when the participants enter and leave the conference During an IVR enabled conference the chairperson can request the system to play the names of all connected participants at the beginning of the conference or at any time during the conference The IVR system plays the recorded list of conference attendees one after the other in the order that they entered the conference The recordings are played to all the conference participants The basic Roll Call contains the following stages 1 Participants connect to the conference and are requested to record their names 2 Participants record their names The recording is automatically terminated after two seconds 3 The system plays the recorded name to each participant and asks the participant to press a pre configured key for confirmation The participant may alternatively record the name again Call Confirmation message is not played to the participant when the flag ROLL_CALL_CONFIRMATION YES default located in the Greet amp Guide IVR section of the system cfg is set to NO i Playing the Roll Call Confirm Record messag
48. a Group in the Reservations database by selecting the Copy Conf option from the right click pop up menu For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 8 Templates Handling The Audio Only Operator conference is identified by the icon AR aaa Audio Only Operator conference gt The Operator icon a is used to identify the operator participating in an Operator conference MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Setting the Participants Connection to the Conference to Attended Mode Lg The participant connection to the conference is set to Attended Mode either at the Entry Queue level if the conference is accessed from the Entry Queue or at the conference level if the conference is accessed directly via an IVR Queue If a conference is accessed via an Entry Queue and an IVR Service is also assigned to the conference the attended mode is set only for the entry queue The Attended Mode is set for a conference only when dial in participants connect to it directly Setting the Entry Queue to Attended Mode To set the Entry Queue to Attended Mode you define an Entry Queue Service in which the On hold for Operator Assistance option is selected in the Welcome dialog box Welcome Message xi IV Enable Welcome Messages General Welcome Message WELCMPNS ACZ Add Message File IV On hold for Operator Assistance lt Back Cancel Help For a detailed description of
49. about On Going Conferences their participants and the number of connected participants A change in participant status usually in attended conferences is also displayed in the Status pane The possible statuses and their indications are listed in Table 3 3 on page 3 15 Locked The conference is locked to dial in conference participants On Hold The conference is on hold all participants hear background music On Hold and The conference was placed on Locked hold and is locked to dial in participants Voting session is in progress where participants express their preference on a set of choices using the touch tone keypad Connection Indicates the connection status of the conference or a participant when no indication is displayed and the conference is running smoothly Conference Indicators Empty No participant was defined for this is conference or none of the defined participants are connected Not Full Not all the participants who were defined for this conference are connected Faulty Participants are connected but the Connection connection is problematic 3 10 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 3 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns Continued Column Description Name j Connection cont Single Only one participant is defined or Participant only one of the defined participants is connected Resource The resources currently installed in Deficiency the MCU suc
50. and the system automatically assigns a Numeric ID after you save the conference on the MCU Entry Queue Select this option when a single dial Entry Queue is used for Access participant access to all conferences Participants are routed from the Entry Queue to their Home conference using the conference Numeric ID or password depending on the MCU configuration Meet Me Per Select this option to enable undefined participants to connect Conf to a conference by dialing the conference dial in number Undefined participants are those who were not defined prior to the conference start When this option is selected a dial in number ISDN participant or a string H 323 participant is assigned to the conference by the system or manually by the operator If the Entry Queue Access option is selected for the conference and you do not want to assign an additional ISDN dial in number to the conference do not select this option Selecting this option activates the Meet Me per Conference tab To define the Meet Me per Conference properties see Defining a New Audio Only Meeting Room on page 5 4 Note If a conference is set as both Entry Queue Access and Meet Me Per Conf to which a separate ISDN dial in number is assigned participants can connect to the conference by means of the Entry Queue and directly using this number If you do not require the direct dialing to the conference or you want to conserve the number of dial in numbers sel
51. and the second time in the IVR queue To avoid hearing the welcome message twice create an empty welcome message that is two seconds long for the IVR Service When the participant enters the conference two seconds of silence will play before the Entry Queue s welcome message 5 Select Enable Welcome Messages to enable a welcome message when the participant connects to the conference If the Enable Welcome Messages option is disabled the Welcome message is skipped and the participant will hear the next prompt in the Entry Queue menu 6 43 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services 6 Define the following parameters Table 6 12 IVR Properties Welcome Message General Welcome e Message to be played when the participant first Message connects to the conferencing service and enters the Entry Queue The list includes all the audio files that were downloaded to the MGC unit s memory for this Message type Add Message File If you have not downloaded the audio files prior to the definition of the Entry Queue Service click the button to download the audio file now On Hold for When you select this option participants are Operator automatically placed the on hold when connecting Assistance and wait for the operator to move them to the destination conference While on hold participants hear background music if this feature is enabled Note Selecting this option results in the Attended status where the operator s assist
52. and then select the Reservation whose occurrences to delete PEE resi New Reservation a Ta New Operator Reservation 3 EEEE resi ga resi Print All EE Paste Ctrl y Ha os ee Ctrl P A confirmation box opens b Click Yes to delete all recurring reservations All the selected Recurrent Reservations are removed 4 58 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Printing Conference Data Lg Once a reservation is made the system allocates the appropriate resources to the conference You can print this data such as the conference name ID start time duration line rate or the participant parameters to a printer file or clipboard to be used by other applications Printed data can be useful in a variety of situations for example e You can send the printed information about reservations in advance to the conference participants letting them know the actual conference settings and the dial in numbers they will use when connecting to the conference e You can use the printed data to keep record of all On Going Conferences and planned activities for the MCU or operators You can print data for a single On Going or Reservation conference or for all the On Going or Reservation conferences Before printing conference information to a printer make sure that a default printer is defined in your workstation To print details of a single conference 1 Expand the On Going Co
53. are disabled only defined participants can connect to the conference Undefined dial in participants can connect only if the Meet Me Per Conf option is enabled for the conference For detailed information about IVR Message services and setup see Chapter 5 IVR and Entry Queue Services Message Select the IVR Service to be used during this Service Name conference from the list of currently defined IVR Message Services The IVR Message Service includes voice messages to be played when participants wait in the IVR queue or during the conference It also includes DTMF codes for operations participants can perform during the conference Note If left blank the default IVR Service is used if one is set as default For more details see Chapter 5 Setting an IVR Message Service as Default 2 23 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants Table 2 2 Conference Properties Basic Settings Continued VTX 1000 Select this option if participants are using VTX 1000 PSTN endpoints to achieve wide band high quality audio The connection between the VTX 1000 and the conference is established through a modem and therefore it requires the allocation of wide band resources These resources are allocated and maintained throughout the call even if the call disconnects or drops to narrow band mid call Note VTX 1000 must be enabled at the MCU level in the system cfg file For a detailed descr
54. automatically selected and cannot be cancelled e for T1 CAS participants e in Audio Look amp Feel mode Continued e when defining participants during Audio Only conference definition in the Conference Properties Participants dialog box When checked changes the participant s status to VIP to distinguish participants who require special attention Note The VIP status can also be changed during the On Going Conference Save Participant Optional When checked saves the participant definition as a template in the User Defined template file or in the selected Database Group Note This check box appears only when defining a participant during conference or reservation definition Participant Linked This check box appears only when defining a participant during the definition of a Reservation template in the database Select this option to save the participant as a template in the database and link the participant to the Reservation template The participant is assigned to the selected database Group If this option is cleared the participant is embedded in the Reservation template and his her parameters are not saved in the database as a Participant template for future use 2 55 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants Table 2 10 ISDN PSTN T1 CAS Properties and Identification Dialog Box Continued Optional This field appears only when participant definition
55. background music You can create a new IVR Message Service when you want to customize audio messages or when you want to modify the IVR system behavior For example a special IVR Message Service can be set for each supported language or for different conference behaviors Different messages can be created for weekdays and holidays or special announcements You can define up to 30 IVR Services for a single MCU Defining a New IVR Message Service Lg Before you define a new IVR Message Service ensure that the required audio and video files are prepared and converted into aca format files otherwise you will not be able to list or select them during the definition process To define a new IVR Message Service 1 Expand the MCU Configuration tree 2 Right click the VR Msg Services icon and then click New IVR Service s Product Management Normal ga MCU Configuration iE Cards a Connections c 7 ig ay Queue Service Messages Status E Properties ria Profiles ig Recording Links 3 On Going Conferences 0 S On Going Gateway Sessions 0 d Participants Queue 0 Reservations 3 E Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 14 F 6 17 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services The IVR Global dialog box opens enabling you to define the general parameters of the IVR Service atona j x IVR Service Name DemoV
56. code for muting individual s line is 6 and 6 for unmuting the line Muting By Participant is indicated by a special w icon You can mute a participant s audio from the participant s right click menu or in the Participant Properties dialog box 4 17 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences To mute un mute participant s audio Using the participant right click menu a Inthe Browse Monitor or Status pane right click the participant s icon and then click Mute Audio 3 i Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Move Participant Copy Participant Ctrl C Cut Ctrl x Delete Del Exclusive Speaker Q amp A Operations gt Attend ACCORD F2 Hold To Home Conf Fg Mute Audio Ctrl M Block Audio Turn Off AGC Properties The menu option changes to Un mute Audio and the status of the audio channel in the Audio column in the Status and Monitor panes changes to Mute Audio Muting by Operator is indicated by a special W icon b To unmute the audio channel for a participant right click the participant s icon and then click Unmute Audio MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition From the Participant Properties dialog box a In any pane of the main window right click the participant s icon and then click Properties The Participant s Properties Identification dialog box opens Identification Advanced Connection Infol Identification
57. conference reverts to the unlocked state and its status and indicators in the Monitor and Status panes are updated accordingly New dial in participants can now connect to the On Going Conference From the Conference Properties dialog box You can lock a conference during the definition stage only when the Meet Me per Conf option is enabled or with the Meeting Room conference type a Inthe On Going Conference Properties dialog box click the Settings tab 4 34 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition If required in the General Settings section click the Advanced button Properties Product Management E General Settings Participants Meet Me Per Conf Recording r General Settings Encryption I Enable IVR Service Msg Service Name VR70 z lt lt Basic I On Hold C Conference Lock J Enable Invite Mute Meet Me parties IT SilencelT J Start Conf Requires Chairperson I Terminate After Chairperson Exits b In the General Settings section click Conference Lock c Click OK The dialog box closes The Locked Conference icon indicates the current status of this conference in the Status column in the Monitor pane When the On Going Conference starts it remains locked until unlocked or until it ends To unlock a conference repeat steps a and b then clear the Conference Lock check box use the conference toolbar button or the right click menu The conference reverts to the unlock
58. conference without disturbing the On Going Conference For this purpose the participant is moved to the operator conference from the Entry Queue IVR queue Welcome queue or On Going Conference 3 7 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences Table 3 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns Continued Column Name 3 8 Name cont Ena of ai conference co alert Faulty audio day conference LJ Secure Gat conference Participant Indicators Dial in participants who were undefined prior to the conference start are named using the conference name and a sequential number that appears between brackets Standard participant ar Chairperson Leader mute all other participants Description Indicates that the conference is about to end An exclamation point next to the conference icon indicates that the conference has a problem and requires operator s assistance The cause of the problem is listed in the Connection column A conference has been secured by the chairperson to prevent outside participants and operators from joining monitoring or controlling it For all secure conference statuses see Table 3 6 on page 3 20 Any dial in or dial out participant connected to the conference The participant defined as the conference chairperson leader The chairperson can manage the conference using touch tone signals DTMF codes for example lock or unlock the conference to dial in participants initiat
59. destination conference according to the conference Numeric ID or password depending on the MCU configuration In the second stage the participant is prompted for the conference password and the chairperson password The participant can also be prompted for additional information To minimize the number of voice prompts to which the caller has to respond before connecting to the conference it is recommended to exclude from the IVR Service prompts that are part of the Entry Queue Service such as the general Welcome message To enable the touch tone commands from the participant s telephone during an On Going Conference an IVR Service must be assigned to the conference 6 49 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services Viewing the Audio Messages Status 6 50 The number of messages that can be downloaded to the MGC unit s Audio card is defined in the system cfg file The audio files for the messages and voice prompts are sorted and stored in groups according to their duration Five duration categories are provided 2 second 4 second 8 second 16 second and 32 second groups The messages are sorted in the Audio card of the MCU The number of messages that can be downloaded to the Audio card for each of these groups is listed in Table 6 15 Table 6 15 Max Number of Messages by Duration Category Group Duration Category Group Max Number of Voice Messages in Group You can check the number of audio files that are curren
60. file Click OK to exit the voting session The dialog box closes Viewing and Saving Voting Results To view voting results 1 Click Details Results to display the full information about the results of the voting session 4 48 2 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition The Voting Details window opens For each option the system displays the total number of votes Yoting Details x Pension Plan Existing Pension Plan 3 Votes Number of votes per choice Demo EQ_929 00 tsa Demo E0_929 000 Names of participants who Sara voted for this option ABC Pension Plan XYZ Pension Plan 1 Vote Demo EQ_928 000 PAT Pension Plan choice 4 Ifthe vote was not anonymous you can view the names of the participants who have voted for each of the listed choices To display names click the icon next to the choice name Ifthe vote was anonymous the system displays only the number of votes for each choice Click OK to close the Voting Details window To save the voting results file 1 In the Voting window click the Save Results button to save the results to a text file The Save As dialog box opens Save as lx Save in amp My Documents xf 0ce Core User Files My Pictures File name Vote Hicard Save as type Text File txt x Cancel 4 The File Name field displays the default name derived from the voting session s title You can
61. gt lt N gt Used to create a new User E E file ora new Reservation Templates file Open lt Ctrl gt lt O gt Opens the User Templates directory or the Reservation Templates directory Used to view and open the contained files Copy Paste lt Ctrl gt lt C gt Copies the properties of a selected OnGoing Paste As lt Ctrl gt lt V gt conference Reservation Entry Queue lt Ctrl gt lt P gt Meeting Room or participant to the clipboard Note To select several items to copy Paste use the standard Windows conventions If you want to modify the selected items name or properties click Paste As lt Ctrl gt lt X gt Copies the conference or participant properties to the clipboard while deleting the original item Used when copying participants from one conference to another 1 7 Chapter 1 VoicePlus Overview Table 1 1 VoicePlus Commands Shortcut Keys Continued Delete lt Del gt Used to terminate a selected On Going Conference Reservation participant operator or template Opens a dialog box to confirm the selection Note To select several items to delete use the standard Windows conventions Save lt Ctrl gt lt S gt Saves a User or Reservation Template file or saves the changes to the database Opens the relevant Help topic Opens the relevant Help topic relevant Help topic Dial in lt Ctrl gt lt l gt Sets the participants Connection Type to Dial Out lt Ctrl gt lt A gt
62. in and all other participants Move a participant from the main conference to a side area for one to one conversation with the Operator Terminate the conference before its scheduled end time Manage Question and Answer queues Control voting polling sessions Configure and enable an audio reminder of impending end of conference with automatic disconnection at scheduled end of conference Secure the conference from unauthorized connection and monitoring Operator assistance on demand Enhanced operator tools for attended participant conferences Monitor conference and participant status Monitor all On Going and reserved conferences for multiple MCUs Application features Customizable voice messages Configurable new feature event alerts Software development kit Access and SQL databases can be used to store participant and conference information Chapter 1 VoicePlus Overview Easily accessible Call Detail Records Local or remote operators Active display of system resources individual participant statuses and conference properties Recording to an external device System Requirements The MGC Manager application can be installed in an environment that meets the following minimum requirements Prerequisites 1 6 Lg IBM PC compatible computer Pentium I 400 MHz CPU or higher Minimum 64 MB RAM recommended 128 MB Windows 98 Windows ME Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating system Modem optional
63. is imposed To enable this function a DTMF code must be configured These operations are listed and defined in the VR Service DTMF Codes dialog box The same operations are also available from the MGC Manager application For a description of the IVR Message Service setup see Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services Start Recording Chairperson Starts a recording session Stop Recording Chairperson Stops a recording session Pause Recording Chairperson Pauses a recording session 4 67 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 4 68 Table 4 4 DTMF Operations Performed During Conference Continued DTMF Function and Message SilencelT Menu The DTMF code to be used to play the SilencelT menu This code is used by the participant that who is muted due to a noisy line Unmute and Return to Conference Unmutes and returns the participant to the conference Return to Conference Muted Returns the muted participant to the conference while remaining muted Adjust SilencelT Sensitivity and Unmute Used by the muted participant to return to the conference unmuted while reducing the noise detection sensitivity This option should be used if you do not want the system to identify a faint noise as a noisy line Disable SilencelT and Unmute Disables the SilencelT option unmutes the line of the participant who is placed on hold by the SilencelT mode and returns the participant to the confere
64. is used Recording Designate the IP participant as an audio recording port connected to an external recording device e None The participant is not connected to an external recording device e Dialup The participant is used as the recording port to an external device For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 9 Recording 2 64 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 2 13 H 323 and SIP Participant Properties Advanced Continued Encryption Node Type The Auto Gain Control AGC mechanism regulates audio noise and volume by balancing the received signal to all participants AGC can be applied to all incoming audio streams prior to mixing thereby dynamically adjusting the amplification of the input signal AGC is automatically enabled for all participants Clear this check box to disable this option for the participant Media information can be encrypted using an AES 128 algorithm The Encryption options are affected by the settings of the participant level flag in the system cfg Select the appropriate encryption setting for the participant e Auto The conference encryption setting encrypted non encrypted is applied to the participant In this mode the participant connects as encrypted only if the conference is defined as encrypted Off The participant joins the Conference Entry Queue non encrypted On The participant joins the Conference Entry Q
65. languages and user specific voice prompts This set is activated when a participant connects to the Polycom VoicePlus conferencing system for conference access or when certain events occur during the conference such as voting sessions Q amp A sessions requests for Operator assistance and modifying self volume The IVR Service automates the connection to the conference process and enables the participant to perform various operations during the conference By combining the input of the caller with menu driven scripts participants can call the conference dial in number and use a touch tone telephone or the endpoint s remote control to interact with the conferencing system installed in the MCU or manually by means of the Restore Configuration utility For details see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 2 Manual Installation of the Default Message Services e Upto 30 IVR Services may be defined for a single MGC unit Ly e The system is shipped with a default IVR Service that can be automatically The Entry Queue Service is a subset of the IVR Service and it can be used in conjunction with IVR for routing dial in participants Entry Queue is a call routing method in which all participants dial the same dial in number and then are routed to the appropriate conference by entering the conference password or conference numeric ID depending on the system s configuration Callers are guided to the conference using menu driven scripts tha
66. list select the filter to delete and then click the Delete Filter button A confirmation dialog box opens MGC Manager xi A re you sure you want to delete Filter DYI ea MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition 2 Click Yes to confirm the deletion The filter is removed from the Filters list The Attended Participants Dialog Box To connect participants waiting in the Participants Queue to the appropriate conference the operator must move the participant to the Operator conference Attend state to talk to the participant and find out the name or details of the destination conference In addition the operator usually needs to enter the participant s general parameters such as name email billing information and more Once the information is entered and the target conference is identified the participant is moved to that conference and the operator moves the next participant in line to the Operator conference An active Operator conference must run on the same MCU as the Participants Queue to be able to assist Participants waiting in the Participants Queue To move a participant to the Operator conference In the Participants Queue list in the Browser pane or in the Participants Queue window double click the icon of the participant you want to move to the Operator conference The participant is automatically moved to the Operator conference and the Attended Participant window opens xi Atened Parti
67. modify this file name The file can be saved only in the text or ASCII format txt Using the standard Windows conventions select the destination folder for the file and then click Save The dialog box closes and you return to the Voting dialog box 4 49 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 3 Click OK to close the Voting dialog box To view the voting results file e Using any word processor open the text file Following is a sample of voting results text file Pension Plan Q Existing Pension Plan 3 Votes Demo EQ_929 001 Demo EQ_928 000 Sara 1 ABC Pension 1 Vote Demo EQ_928 000 8 choice 8 Placing a Conference On Hold An operator or a chairperson can place an On Going Conference On Hold In this state conference participants hear background music If you place the conference On Hold during its definition or when starting it you can cancel the On Hold state later for example when all the participants have successfully connected You can activate and deactivate the On Hold function from the Conference right click menu from the Conference toolbar or from the On Going Conference Properties dialog box Alternatively chairpersons can place a conference on hold using the appropriate DTMF code the default DTMF code is 1 4 50 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition When the conference is placed on hold the Conference On Hold icon is displayed i
68. name again or remain on the line to enter the conference has joined the conference has left the conference 9 The conference participants are NAMERCRD ACA NAMEIS ACA RERECRD ACA JOINED ACA LEFT ACA ROLLCALL ACA This is the end of the participants LISTEND ACA list To reduce the noise detection level and return to the conference press 3 To disable noise detection and return to the conference press 4 SLNRDRT ACA SLNDNDRT ACA Your line is muted due to a noisy SLNMUTE ACA line For available options press 9 6 61 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 6 16 Default IVR Messages Continued SilencelT To return to the conference muted SLNRTMUT ACA Return to the press 2 conference muted SilencelT To unmute and return to the SLNUNMTR ACA Unmute and return conference press 1 to the conference SilencelT To unmute your line at any time SLNUNMUT ACA Unmute reminder Press pound 6 SilencelT line is muted due to a noisy line PARTDET ACA Participant detected as noisy indication to the conference 6 62 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Fine Tuning the SilencelT Algorithm The audio energy measurements are done by connecting an endpoint to an ongoing conference and using the IP Terminal to detect the noise speech level The values measured are then compared to the valu
69. newly requested participant Phone IP Lists the phone numbers or IP addresses of all listed participants Lists the aliases of all listed participants Conn Type Indicates the participant s connection type e Dial in participants call the conference e Dial out the system calls the participant For the description of connection types see Participant Connection to Conference on page 2 8 Conf Name Lists the names of the conferences in which each participant is defined MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 2 6 Participants Scheduling Conflicts Table Conf Type Indicates the conference type e Res Reservation e Conf On Going Conference Start Time Date and start time of each conference End Time Date and termination time of each conference reservation is being scheduled while the WebCommander application checks for Ly The MGC Manager application checks for conflicts on the MCU on which the conflicts on multiple MCUs To resolve the scheduling conflicts for participants 1 or In the Participants Scheduling Conflicts table select an action Select the check boxes of non conflicting participants in the Requested Participants column to retain these participants in the currently scheduled conference Clear the check boxes of conflicting participants in the Requested Participants column to exclude these participants from the currently scheduled conference
70. occur every 2 weeks enter the value 2 in the Week s on box To define a reservation that recurs twice a week select an additional day of the week at which the conference is to be repeated and set the interval to 1 Recurrence Monthly By default the system sets the day Pattern cont according to the day defined for the first conference You can choose either the day of a month or a schedule sequence Daily By default all the days of the week are selected To exclude a certain day of the week for example the weekend clear the check box Weekly By default the system selects the day of the week as set in the Scheduler calendar for the first reservation You can also define the recurrence interval in weeks For example if you want the reservation to occur every 2 weeks enter the value 2 in the Week s on box To define a reservation that recurs twice a week select an additional day of the week at which the conference is to be repeated and set the interval to 1 2 45 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants 2 46 Table 2 8 Reservation Recurrence Settings Continued Range of Define the range of reservation recurrences Recurrence End After number of Occurrences Specify after how many recurrences the reservation will end The default value is 1 the range is 1 2000 End By date Specify the date for the last occurrence of the recurring re
71. participant s VIP status is revoked Adjusting Participant s Broadcasting and Listening Volume The broadcasting and listening volume of the participant s audio transmission can be changed during an On Going Conference This operation is applicable to all interface types To adjust the broadcasting and listening volume for the participant In the Browser Monitor or Status panes right click the participant s icon and then click Properties Alternatively double click the 1 participant icon The Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens team3 isdn Properties Connection Info2 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Advanced Connection Infot Name team3 isdn Connection Type Interface Type Dial out E ISDN Participant Numbers 61234567 MCU Numbers Extension Identifier String Meet me per Party 7 User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 0K Cancel Apply ISDN Telephone Participant Identification Properties Michelle Properties E ConnectionInfo2 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Advanced Connection Infol Name Michelle Connection Type Interface Type Dial out Z H323 x Participant IP Signaling Port Momaea fira Alias Name Alias Type H Id i User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Listening Volume 5 Broadcasting Volume 5 E A F Audio
72. played when the participants request to unmute their own line 6 27 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 6 7 IVR Service Properties General Messages Continued Message Type Chairperson Help Menu 1 Chairperson Help Menu 2 Participant Menu 1 6 28 Message Description A help menu which is played on chairperson s request Lists operations that can be performed by the chairperson and their respective DTMF codes to participants requesting it The playback can be stopped anytime The length of a voice message that can be recorded for a Help file is limited to 30 seconds To overcome this limitation two audio files can be played one after another as a single menu Grouping of two audio files into one help menu can be done for the chairperson help menu as well as for the participant help menu If you configure two help menu messages they will be heard in sequence as one menu Chairperson Help Menu 1 is the first file that will be played The help menus are usually recorded by the conferencing service provider as voice massages and are configured as any other voice message in the system Note If you intend to modify the default DTMF codes the default voice message files for the help menus that are shipped with the system will have to be replaced with new recordings that list the new DTMF codes The audio file containing additional DTMF codes that can be used by the chairperson when two help menu
73. running you can click New Conference in the Conferences box to start a new conference for the participant then select the conference and click Move If the participant s Meeting Room is not active select the Meeting Room from the list and then click Start Meeting Room Once the Meeting Room is active click Move When you move the presently attended participant to his her Home destination conference and he she is the last participant in the Participants Queue the following message appears MGC Manager x A The participants queue is empty e If the Participants Queue includes only On Hold participants the following message is displayed MGC Manager i xj This participant has been placed on hold and is the last participant in the queue Do you want to assist this participant Yes No Click Yes to attend a participant that was placed on hold Click No to leave the participant on hold in the Participants Queue To move a participant to the Home conference This option can be used only when the participant is moved from his her original conference to the Participants Queue and you want to move him her back to original conference In this case the name of the Home Conference is automatically displayed and selected in the Conferences list MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition In the Attended Participant window click the To Home Conf button Attended Participant Karen xj p Attened Participant P
74. see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 6 Defaults For a description on how to load the user defined default titles see MGC Manager User s Guide Vol I Chapter 3 Loading the User Defined Default Set to the MGC Manager Application Broadcasting If necessary adjust the level of sound transmitted by Volume this participant heard by the operator and later by other participants To adjust the volume move the slider The volume scale is from 1 to 10 where 1 is the weakest and 10 the strongest volume The volume of each endpoint s audio at connection time is set to 5 One movement of the volume slider increases or decreases the volume by one unit equivalent to 3db Listening Volume If necessary adjust the level of sound heard by this participant To adjust the volume move the slider The volume scale is from 1 to 10 where 1 is the weakest and 10 the strongest volume The volume of each endpoint s audio at connection time is set to 5 One movement of the volume slider increases or decreases the volume by one unit equivalent to 3db Disconnect Click this button to disconnect the participant from the MCU 7 23 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing Table 7 6 Attended Participant Dialog Box Fields Continued Apply If you have modified any of the participant volume levels Broadcasting or Listening click this button to apply the changes and affect the participant volume If any of the other p
75. system for use by the Call Detail Record CDR utility Connected The number of participants currently connected to the conference Dial In Number The number participants can use to dial into the conference from a telephone ISDN line Join Conference The names of conferences the Operator Conference has joined e Operator Conference the name of the conference joined by the operator On Going Conference the name of the operator who joined the conference the operator conference name is identical to the operator s login name Entry Password The password to be used by participants to join the conference Chairperson The password to be used by a participant to join the Password conference as the chairperson 3 4 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 3 1 On Going Conference Status Parameters Continued Numeric ID The unique per MCU Conference Numeric ID as assigned by the operator or the system Encryption Indicates if encryption is enabled for the conference H 323 Service The H 323 prefix allocated to the conference Prefix General Conference and Participant Monitoring The conference level monitoring allows you to view the status of an On Going Conference and its participants Conference properties may be displayed in the Status pane or in the Monitor pane The Status pane enables you to view the properties of one conference at a time The Monitor pane enables you to view several confere
76. the Reservations list If the MCU does not have enough resources to run the conference an appropriate error message is displayed MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Connecting to an On Going Conference You can add dial out participants to the conference either by selecting the participants from the Participant database from a User Template file or by defining them directly during the On Going Conference For a discussion on adding participants directly to the conference see Chapter 4 Adding New Participants to a Conference on page 4 22 Dial in participants can connect directly to the conference using its dial in number PSTN ISDN T1 CAS participants dialing string composed of the IP Network Service Prefix and conference Numeric ID H 323 participant or the conference URI SIP participant Undefined participants connect to a conference by using the conference dial in number ISDN T1 CAS PSTN dialing string H 323 or SIP URI SIP The ISDN T1 CAS dial in number the H 323 Network Service Prefix and conference numeric ID are displayed in the Status pane of the MGC Manager main window To view the list of On Going Conferences and their dial in numbers e Expand the MCU tree and then click the On Going Conferences icon The list of On Going Conferences with their H 323 Network Service Prefixes Numeric IDs and dial in numbers are displayed in the Status pane ISDN T1 CAS PSTN status Starts
77. the Entry Queue Service definition see Chapter 6 Defining a New Entry Queue Message Service This Entry Queue Service must be assigned to the Entry Queue which will be used for attended dial in connections to conferences 7 9 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing Setting the Conference Connection to Attended Mode The connection to the conference is set in the IVR Service assigned to the conference by selecting On hold for Operators Assistance in the IVR Welcome Message dialog box Welcome Message xi IV Enable Welcome Messages General Welcome Message feonfconnaca Add Message File IV Enable Conference Welcome Message confconn aca 7 Add Message File IV On hold for Operator Assistance This IVR Service is then assigned to the conference to which dial in participants connect and are assisted by the operator MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Participants Queue Management The Participants Queue window lists all the participants waiting for the operator s assistance Participants are automatically added to the Participants Queue in the following circumstances e The IVR Entry Queue Service is set to attended mode On hold for Operator assistance and the operator is required to connect the participant to the conference e The participant fails to connect to the conference by entering the wrong conference Numeric ID or conference password and waits for the operator s assistance
78. the new password The new password is invalid chairperson or participant enters the existing password e Voting session e Invite session e Roll Call session e Entry Queue with waiting participants The default DTMF code for playing the appropriate Help menu is 83 In an Entry Queue Access conference both the conference and chairperson passwords must be unique and cannot be identical to any other conference that is accessed via the Entry Queue 4 70 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Request DTMF Help Menu Participants in an Audio Only conference can request a playback of the list of all available operations and their assigned DTMF codes The playback can be initiated by participants or the chairperson at any time during the conference by pressing the appropriate DTMF code It can also can be stopped at any time This help menu is recorded by the conference provider as a voice message and is configured like any other voice message in the system The Help menus follow the type of participants permission chairperson or ordinary and status e Participant Help for ordinary participants e Chairperson Help for the conference chairperson e Voting Help for the participant controlling the voting session e Invite Help for the participant inviting others to the conference during an invite session Dialing Out to Invite Participants Invite Session In an Invite session the chairpe
79. the selected Database Group Note This check box appears only when defining a participant during conference or reservation definition Participant Linked This check box appears only when defining a participant during the definition of a Reservation template in the database Select this option to save the participant as a template in the database and link the participant to the Reservation template The participant is assigned to the selected database Group If this option is cleared the participant is embedded in the Reservation template and his her parameters are not saved in the database as a Participant template for future use 8 Optional Click the Advanced tab The Advanced parameters definition may be skipped for most participants if the default settings are used 2 63 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants The IP Participant Properties Advanced dialog box opens xl Identification Advanced Service Name Recording None M age Encryption Off iad Node Type Teminal z J Enable PSTN Dial in I Save Participant Cancel Help 9 Define the following parameters Table 2 13 H 323 and SIP Participant Properties Advanced Service Name Enter the name of the IP Network Service handling the call Note that the system is case sensitive If left blank the default IP Network Service H 323 or SIP depending on the Interface Type
80. to the conference ISDN for participants connecting via ISDN or PSTN lines H 323 for participants using the H 323 protocol SIP for participants using a SIP Protocol T1 CAS for participants using a Channel Associated Signaling CAS connection Participant definitions differ according to their selected Interface Types ISDN PSTN T1 CAS Participant Definition 3 Define the following parameters for ISDN PSTN T1 CAS participants The definition of the Advanced parameters may be skipped for most participants but if you need to change the defaults or define additional settings open the tab 2 51 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants Table 2 10 ISDN PSTN T1 CAS Properties and Identification Dialog Box Participant This parameter is enabled for the Dial out connection Numbers type or when the Dial in Meet Me Per Conference MCU option is selected Type the participant s number including country and area codes when required to be dialed by the MCU when connecting the participant to the conference If the Meet Me Per MCU option is enabled the CLI number is used to identify the participant and route them to the appropriate conference Enter the participant s CLI number MCU Numbers This field is enabled only to Dial in Meet Me Per MCU participants Enter the MCU number as allocated to the MCU by the carrier The dial in numbers are defined in the ISDN Network S
81. vote by pressing the appropriate code assigned to each choice You can start or cancel a voting session by clicking the Enable Cancel Voting button on the Conference toolbar 4 46 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition The voting results are shown in the Voting Results section otin xl m Voting Settings m Voting results Title Number of participants f4 Number of voters 4 0 4 4 ib 3 3 2 fe 3 2 2 4 5 je 1 1 6 it o o 8 us era RUE rasa E d Aas g I7 Show results as percentage with reference to Voters onl All Participants IV Show results as number of votes ov 26 2003 17 43 41 PM Apply Details Results OK Cancel Restart Voting Cancel Voting Stop Voting The following information is displayed in the Voting Results pane Table 4 3 Voting Results Parameters Number of Displays the number of participants currently Participants connected to the conference Number of Voters Displays the number of participants who have already voted This number is updated continuously according to the number of voters Show results as Select this option to display the number of votes for percentage with each choice as percentage If checked select the reference to category from which to calculate the percentage e Voters Only Displays the percentage of participants who voted for each choice out of the total number of voters All Participants Disp
82. when you want certain participants such as participants designated as VIP to ask questions first and others to be moved to the end of the queue To change the participant s position in the Q amp A queue Right click the Participant icon click Q amp A Management and then select the required position B Michelle Disconnect Participant Ctri T Move Participant gt Copy Participant Ctrl C Cut Ctrl xX Delete Del Exclusive Speaker Q amp A Management Remove Participant From Q amp A Change to Chairperson Move Participant to First Position in Q amp A Aen F2 Move Participant to Last Position in Q amp A aa i G Move Participant Position Up in Q amp A Ge Sme E Move Participant Position Down in Q amp A To Home Conf F3 Unmute Audio Ctrl U Turn Off AGC Properties You can move participants to the following positions in the Q amp A queue First position Last position Up one position Down one position Alternatively select the participant to move by clicking the Participant icon and then on the Q amp A toolbar click d to move the participant to the first position in Q amp A queue or La to move the participant to the last position in Q amp A queue MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Allowing Participant Questions Participants in the Q amp A queue can ask a question after the permission is granted to them by the conference chairperson or the operator e The operato
83. 182 lt E lt 256 76 lt E lt 91 Noisy V lt 50 Or 152 lt E lt 182 67 lt E lt 76 Noisy V lt 50 Or 134 lt E lt 152 0 lt E lt 67 Noisy V lt 50 Or 128 lt E lt 134 E gt 1000 700 lt V 150 lt V lt 200 E gt 1000 650 lt V lt 700 150 lt V lt 200 E gt 1000 600 lt V lt 650 150 lt V lt 200 E gt 1000 500 lt V lt 600 150 lt V lt 200 E gt 1000 700 lt V 200 lt V lt 250 E gt 1000 650 lt V lt 700 200 lt V lt 250 6 65 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services 6 66 10 11 12 13 Table 6 17 Noisy Line Tuning Table Noise Consecutive Parameter E gt 1000 600 lt V lt 650 200 lt V lt 250 15 E gt 1000 500 lt V lt 600 200 lt V lt 250 16 By default the SilenceIT mechanism is disabled To enable it right click the MCU icon and then click MCU Utils gt Edit system cfg In the AUDIO PLUS FLAGS section add the flag NOISE_LINE_DETECTION and enter the value found in step 9 Setting the flag value to 0 disables the SilenceIT mechanism For more details about flag definition and system cfg see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 5 Click OK Reset the MCU Attended Conferencing An operator Attended conference is a service designed usually for large conferences and can contain both dial in and dial out participants In many attended conferences the name and the telephone number of each dial out participant is given to the operator at the time the reservation is made For dial in participant
84. 3 POLYCOM gt MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Version 9 0 4 August 2010 DOC2235A Trademark Information Polycom the Polycom Triangles logo and the names and marks associated with Polycom s products are trademarks and or service marks of Polycom Inc and are registered and or common law marks in the United States and various other countries All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Patent Information The accompanying product is protected by one or more U S and foreign patents and or pending patent applications held by Polycom Inc 2010 Polycom Inc All rights reserved Polycom Inc 4750 Willow Road Pleasanton CA 94588 2708 USA No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of Polycom Inc Under the law reproducing includes translating into another language or format As between the parties Polycom Inc retains title to and ownership of all proprietary rights with respect to the software contained within its products The software is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provision Therefore you must treat the software like any other copyrighted material e g a book or sound recording Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate Polycom Inc is not responsible for
85. 39 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 25 26 27 28 29 1 2 3 4 Ending Time Starting 03 26 PM Jan 12 2005 Cancel Apply Help 4 Click OK to apply the settings The Conference Properties dialog box closes The time format is derived from the Operating System time format defined in the Regional Settings 4 54 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Ending a Conference before its Scheduled Termination Time You can manually end the conference before its scheduled end time Usually this option is used when all the participants disconnected from the conference or if the meeting organizer has requested it To manually terminate a conference manually 1 Expand the On Going Conferences list right click the icon of the conference to end and then click Terminate Beret Stop Monitoring Monitor Filter New Participan 3 Copy Conf Ctrl C Paste Participant Ctrlt Paste Participant As Ctrl P Lock Conference Mute Meet Me parties On Hold Voting Join to Conference F10 Print Reservation Data Properties Alternatively use the shortcut key the default key is lt Del gt or click the Terminate button on the Conference toolbar A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the action Click Yes The conference is terminated The conference name and its icon are removed from the On Going Conferences list 4 55 Chapter 4 O
86. 5 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Call Disconnection Reason C NoNet Connection Bad H243 Connection Participant Hang Up Resource Defficiency Gatekeeper Failure Security Failure H323 Failure Operator name Ee Video Disconnection Reason Secondary Incoming video channel does not match conference video settings Remote device does not support the current video parameters Remote device failed to change its video parameters Video stream violation during session Video channel rejected by inadequate H 323 card resources Cause Possible Solution The following information is displayed for the disconnected participant Table 3 17 VoIP Participant Properties Disconnection Cause Call Disconnection Gatekeeper Failure and H323 Failure disconnection cause categories are exclusive to H 323 participants All other statuses are identical to ISDN participants and are described in Table 3 12 ISDN Participant Properties Disconnection Cause on page 3 37 e Gatekeeper Failure Participant s failure to connect to the conference is caused by the gatekeeper H323 Failure Participant s failure to connect to the conference is caused by the MCU H 323 card Describes the cause of disconnection according to the category indicated in the Call Disconnection Reason 3 45 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences Table 3 17 VoIP Participant Properties Disconnect
87. 878 000 8 EQ Demo_878 001 In the Status pane the conference parameters are displayed End Time Dial in Number Starts At Connection E MCUs Network L apha Alpha 02 Single Participant Dec 01 2003 15 22 44 Dec 01 2003 17 22 44 5338 E L alpha 06 Normal HH NS ACCORD H 4 Audio Sales b Defaut Audio Default Conferencg Dec 01 2003 15 27 01 Dec 01 2003 17 27 01 5345 On Hold Dec 01 2003 15 27 23 Dec 01 2003 17 27 23 5346 301 Dec 01 2003 15 23 18 Dec 01 2003 17 23 18 5341 300 Dec 01 2003 14 32 14 Dec 01 2003 16 32 14 5331 aS EE Reservations 0 Meeting Rooms 0 The following conference parameters are listed in the Status table Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences Table 3 1 On Going Conference Status Parameters Name The name of the On Going Conference and an icon indicating the conference type and status For a detailed description of the various conference and participant icons see the description of the Monitor pane columns in Table 3 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns page 3 7 Status Additional information about the conference status such as Locked or On Hold Connection The connection status of the participant such as Connected or Disconnected Starts At The actual start date and time of the conference The scheduled end date and time of the conference ID A sequential ID number assigned to the conference by the
88. ACA Assistance operator will assist you momentarily NID Conference Please enter your conference ID CNFIDRQS ACA ID Request Press the pound key when complete NID Conference Invalid conference ID Please try CNFIDFL ACA ID failure indication again Leader For conference chairperson ENTRYOPT ACA Chairperson services press the pound key All identifier request other participants please wait Leader Please enter the conference LEDRPASS ACA Chairperson chairperson password Press the password request pound key when complete Leader Invalid chairperson password LEDRRTRY ACA Chairperson Please try again password failure 6 54 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 6 16 Default IVR Messages Continued Message Type Message Text FileName Personal code Please enter your personal code PINRQST ACA request Press the pound key when complete Personal code Invalid personal code PINFAIL ACA failure Press any key Press any key to enter the ANYKEY ACA conference General The conference is now secured SECURED ACA Conference Secured General The conference is now in an UNSECURE ACA Conference Un unsecured mode secured General Wait for Please wait for the chairperson to LDRWAIT ACA chairperson join or start the conference General First to You are the first person to join the FIRST ACA join conference General I
89. Attended conference see Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing Conference Level Operations The following operator actions are performed at the conference level Add new participants Mute dial in participants upon their connection to the conference Add remarks during session Lock and unlock a conference Control Question and Answer sessions Conduct Voting sessions Place a conference on hold Modify the conference general parameters MGC Manager only 4 3 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences e Change the conference duration while in session e End a conference before its scheduled termination time e Reschedule a conference reservation e Send conference details to a file printer or clipboard Participant Level Operations Making Dial Out Connections When the Dial Out Manually option is selected for the conference the operator has to manually connect dial out participants to the conference This can be necessary when the connected participant is accidently disconnected from the conference To establish a dial out connection e Right click the disconnected participant icon and then click Connect Participant team 1 Move Participant b Copy Participant Ctrl C Cut Ctrl x Delete Del Q amp A Management gt Dial In Ctrl I Properties During the connection process the participant s status and icon which is displayed in the Connection column changes from Standby to Co
90. C Administrator s Guide Chapter 5 Edit system cfg Note This field is applicable only to VR enabled conferences that are configured to prompt for the entry password or to conferences accessed from an Entry Queue using passwords as the routing method Web Enter a numeric password for participants to use to identify Chairperson themselves as the conference chairperson This password is Password only required in VR enabled conferences that are configured to prompt for the chairperson password Note This password is also used to monitor the conference from the WebCommander application Numeric ID A unique Numeric ID NID is assigned to each conference as a unique identification number It is used for accessing the conference from the Entry Queue and as part of the dialing string when dialing into the conference from an H 323 endpoint The Numeric ID can be assigned manually or automatically To manually assign the NID enter a unique number of digits defined in the system cfg file If you do not assign the Numeric ID the MCU automatically assigns a number after the completion of the conference definition when the conference is saved on the MCU 2 17 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants Table 2 1 Conference Properties General Continued Numeric ID Note If the MCU is configured to support only automatic cont assignment of Numeric IDs then this field is disabled
91. Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication The Meeting Room is activated when the first participant connects to it The conference connection information is given to all other participants by the Meeting Room owner The Meeting Room is terminated when the last participant disconnects from the conference or when the chairperson leaves the conference depending on the conference settings However Meeting Rooms can be manually terminated at any time by the MGC Manager operator or by the conference chairperson via the WebCommander or by using the appropriate DTMF code On Going Conferences An On Going Conference is a conference that has already started An On Going Conference is created to start immediately or was pre set previously and the scheduled time to start has arrived Reservations Reservations are conferences scheduled to start at some time in the future Reservations are defined using the same parameters as On Going Conferences with the addition of the conference start date and time When defining a Reservation you can also schedule a recurrent conference Each occurrence is deleted from the MCU when it ends Attended and Unattended Conferences Audio Only conferences can be managed by an Operator who takes an active part in the conference or they can run unattended while the participants manage the conference themselves with the meeting organizer who optionally has additional privileges All
92. Click the Connection Info2 tab The Participant Properties Connection Info2 dialog box opens Audio party Properties Identification Advanced Connection Infot Connection Info2 H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Connection Time flan 23 2005 16 27 05 PM Disconnection Time Connection Retries Left p m Mute By Operator gt gt Attending Audio F Oper Participant r Mute By Participant 5 F Audio BP cicins Mute By MCU Participant Attending State FE Audis r Gatekeeper Status Requested Bandwidth Gatekeeper State C ARG jz KBPS Admitted Allocated C DRG jiz KBPS None Request Info Interval IV Gatekeeper routed 0 Sec 3 41 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences The following information is displayed for a connected participant Table 3 15 VoIP Participant Properties Connection Info2 Connection Time The date and time the participant connected to the conference Disconnection The date and time the participant was disconnected Time from the conference Connection The number of retries left for the system to connect Retries Left the participant to the conference Mute If checked indicates the participant s audio channel By Operator was muted by the operator during the conference To unmute the participant clear this check box Mute By Indicates if the Audio channel has been muted by the Participant participant M
93. Conference 5 8 Manually Assigning the H 323 Service Prefix to the COMECHENCE i csiiieascecctusins tuusasiestostessevecuuadotnnencesbanuhosvaceesieacans 5 10 Completing the Meeting Room Definition 5 11 Listing Meeting ROOMS o eee eee eeeeeeceeeeseeseeeeeseeeeeeees 5 11 Defining a New Audio Only Entry Queue 0 cece eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 13 Enabling Encryption for Entry Queues cee eee 5 17 Lasting Entry Queues ssi sctesesssssederecssuse iaiecaavecaed ocasssexeaveseoasnedss 5 19 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Dialing in to an Entry Queue oo eee eeeceeeseceeeeeeeseeseeeeeas 5 20 IVR and Entry Queue Services 200 eee e eens 6 1 CONTErENCE ACCESS dsni siae iaee a s eeni 6 2 Bie h E E E A E E E 6 2 TVR Queue ACCESS inei e e e aS 6 2 Enty Queue ACCESS enoii e EEEE Aaa 6 2 IVR Entry Queue Stages eee cece eeeeeeeeceeteeeaeeeeneeas 6 3 Operations Performed Using IVR Services 0 eee eeeees 6 3 Using ROU Call cscdecasessctee neiccen aeai eenas 6 5 Using Silence lT neri saiiesn sinnini cnssncsi saia 6 7 Enabling SilencelT oo eee ce ceeceeeesesesseeesesseeeeenees 6 7 TVIREREQUITEMENIS sriesiiieinsesnesi iE 6 9 avd Wate iiser a 6 9 Audio File Conversion ssseessesesseeeseesrsresrsrrrsresreresrsenreresesrernreseses 6 9 Defining IVR Software Module Properties s ssssssseesseeessseeseersrseeeee 6 10 Setting IVR Message Services s esseesesessseesssesrsrresiesrsreeeresesresesrsest
94. Conferences Reservations and Participants When an IVR Service is assigned to the conference participants are guided to the conference by voice prompts to use DTMF codes and are requested to enter the required conference chairperson password They can also be prompted for additional information such as their billing code IVR Access The IVR Service and the Entry Queue Access can be used for Attended and Unattended conferences The conference password is used to provide security for the conference In all Audio and Video conferences the IVR Service must be assigned to the conference to enable DTMF code input by the participant and chairperson In IVR enabled conferences the caller enters the conference VR queue as part of the connection process Participants connect to the conference IVR queue by dialing the conference dial in numbers Using the telephone keypad participants input the required information to menu driven scripts and voice prompts that are part of the IVR Service Once the correct information is entered the participants are connected to the conference Conference1 Numeric ID 1222 aa Password 34567 IP phone IP Network Service Prefix 925 Conference2 Numeric ID 1223 Password 71356 Figure 2 3 Dial in connection via IVR system In the example in Figure 2 3 a dial in number and a numeric ID are assigned to each conference In addition an IVR Service is also assigned to the conference Whe
95. DR file and moved to the Remarks History box Locking and Unlocking a Conference 4 32 The operator or chairperson can lock or unlock an On Going Conference to undefined dial in participants In addition you can lock a conference during its definition and if required unlock it while it is going on The purpose of conference locking is to Limit the number of undefined dial in participants connecting to the conference Prevent additional participants from connecting to the conference once all the required participants are connected Save resources You can lock and unlock the conference from the right click menu from the toolbar or from the Conference Properties dialog box Alternatively chairpersons can lock or unlock a conference from their endpoint using the appropriate DTMF code The default code is 7 for locking 7 for unlocking MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition To lock and unlock an On Going Conference Using the Conference right click menu a Expand the On Going Conferences list b Right click the conference icon and then click Lock Conference isp Polycom Audio Conference Monitor Monitor Filter New Participant F8 Terminate Del Copy Conf Ctrl C Paste Participant Ctrl Paste Participant As Ctrl P Next Questioner Clear Qad Mute Meet Me parties On Hold Voting Joint Print Reservation Data Properties The Locked Conference icon 4 is
96. Dial out Conference Termination start Click amp view DTMF string Permission Everyone Chairperson Everyone Everyone Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson chairperson Everyone Everyone Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Everyone Everyone chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Everyone chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Everyone For a full list of IVR messages and their DTMF codes see MGC Manager User s Guide Vol I Chapter 6 Using DTMF Codes during a Conference 6 53 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services Default IVR Prompts and Messages The system is shipped with the following audio prompts and messages Table 6 16 Default IVR Messages Message Type Type Message Text Text Welcome Eas Ee to Polycom Lae ACA Conferencing Connecting to You are now being connected to CONFCONN ACA conference your conference Conference Please enter the conference CONFPASS ACA password request password Press the pound key when complete Conference Invalid conference password CONFRTRY ACA password failure Please try again Disconnection Msg You are now being disconnected GOODBYE ACA from the conference Goodbye Operator Please wait The conference OPERHELP
97. I Dial Out Manually From database From directory OK Cancel Apply Help If the conference includes dial out participants they should be defined here or assigned from a template You have to define whether the dial out participants will be automatically called by the MCU at the conference start time or if they will be manually connected by the operator or conference chairperson If the Meet Me Per Conf option is selected in the Properties General tab you can allow undefined dial in participants to connect to the conference by selecting the Allow Undefined Participants option This 2 29 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants option is automatically selected and cannot be cleared when defining Meeting Rooms or Entry Queue Access conferences for the conference The appropriate flag must be set in the system cfg file and a T1 CAS Network Service must be defined in the system For more information see the Administrator s Guide Chapter 3 Completing the T1 CAS Network Service Definition and Assigning the T1 CAS Network service to the Net 2 Nrt 4 Nrt 8 Card T1 CAS participants can be connected to conferences if T1 CAS is enabled 8 If required add participants to the conference using the following options Table 2 3 Conference Properties Participants Pre Defined Lists the names of participants defined in the source file Participants that contains
98. IVR Service or leave this field blank if you wish to use a default IVR Service The selected IVR Service all its properties including Roll Call and SilencelT if those are enabled will be applied to this On Going Conference or Reservation conf genl meet Properties Product Management x General Settings Participants Meet Me Per Conf Recording General Settings Er M Enable IVR Servi A Msg Service Name I vTX 1000 lt lt Basic I OnHold I Conference Lock J Enable Invite 7 Mute Meet Me parties I SilencelT I Start Conf Requires Chairperson JT Terminate After Chairperson Exits F Auto Termination Before First Join 5 Min After Last Qutt M Min Media Settings Audio Alg lt lt Basic I Roll Call I7 Entry Tone Roll Call announcement M End Time Alert Tone 5 Exit Tone Roll Call announcement Audio Mix Depth 3 Sites 6 40 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Defining a New Entry Queue Message Service An Entry Queue Message Service is a subset of an IVR Message Service that is used with Entry Queues It includes a set of voice prompts that are used to guide the caller to the appropriate conference You can create different Entry Queue Services for different languages and personalized voice messages To set the new Entry Queue Message Service 1 2 Expand the MCU tree and then expand the MCU Configuration tree Right click the IVR Ser
99. Manager it is displayed in LY The new placement of the window at the time you close the MGC Manager the same location 7 13 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing Participants Queue Toolbar The Participants Queue toolbar is enabled when an Operator Conference is running and a Participant icon or Operator icon is selected The Participants Queue toolbar contains the following buttons Table 7 3 Participants Queue Toolbar Buttons CO a 2 Attend Participant Moves the participant to the Operator conference for operator s assistance Place Participanton Places the attended participant on Hold The participant hears an IVR message while on hold a Move to Home Moves the participant to the Home destination Conference conference Participant Queue Filter Toolbar 7 14 The Participant Queue Filter toolbar options enable displaying the list of participants who are waiting to be connected to the conference according to selected criteria Table 7 4 Participant Queue Filter Toolbar Buttons me Resin o waua Participant Lists the Participant Queue filters Queue Filter List currently defined in the system PARTICIPANTS Participant Opens the Participants Queue Filter QUEUE FILTER Queue Filter dialog box where you define a new Participants Queue Filter Delete Filter si the selected Participant Queue MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Using Participants Queue Filters You can determine the
100. Name C Label T INone x Group V Root x om ene If more than one database is configured in your system select the appropriate database from the Database Name list Filter the list of participants by clicking the Name and or Label check boxes entering the appropriate character string in the Name field and or selecting the appropriate label from the drop down list The Group option is enabled by default displaying the highest group in the Groups hierarchy to which the logged in user has access You may select another group from the Groups hierarchy list Only groups to which you have access are listed in the Groups list Click OK The list of all the participants in the filtered category is displayed in the Pre Defined Participants list and the name of the participant s Group is displayed in the Pre Defined Participants File You can now add names from this list to the Conference Participants In the Pre defined Participants list select the participants to add to the conference and click the Add 2 button To add participants from the User Template file a Click the Browse button to list the User Template files stored on your computer The Browse dialog box opens letting you select the User Template file usr Using standard windows conventions select the User Template file and click Open MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition The participants in the User Template file are listed in the
101. O Participant Phone Number s 99251241 Num Type Taken from service Channel Width 64 kbps Number of Channels 1 Bonding Mode Off Chair No Voice Node Type Terminal 4 61 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences To print details of all On Going Conferences or Reservations 1 Expand the On Going Conferences list or the Reservations list 2 You can print details using one of the following options In the Reservations list right click the Reservations icon and then click Print All Reservations 9 New Reservation New Operator Reservation Delete 3 x recurrences Corley Gtrl P On Going Conferences list right click the On Going Conferences icon and then click Print All Fp On Going Conferences 2 New Conference New Operator Conference Paste Gtri y Paste As Ctrl P The Print All dialog box opens listing all On Going Conferences or Reservations currently defined or running on the MCU i 8 8 6 l MFinance MPlanning MPolycom Q4 To exclude items from printing clear the check box next to the name 3 Click OK The Print dialog box opens 4 Define the printing options and save the output as described in steps 3 4 and 5 on page 4 60 If File is selected as the printing destination the data of all the conferences are printed to the same text file 4 62 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Managing Confer
102. Ori M vip _ ee ee ok Cancel IP Participant Identification Properties MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition 2 Move the slider to the right or to the left to increase or to lower the Broadcasting or Listening Volume level for a participant The Volume scale is between 1 to 10 where 1 is the lowest and 10 is the highest The default volume at the connection time is 5 Each movement of the Volume slider increases or reduces the volume by one unit that is equivalent to 3 dB 3 Click OK Participants in an On Going Conference can adjust the volume of the audio transmitted from and to their endpoint using the appropriate DTMF code e Broadcasting volume to increase the volume use 9 to lower 9 e Listening volume to increase use 76 to lower 76 Muting and Unmuting Participant s Audio Occasionally a conference organizer may want to exclude the audio of a specific participant from part of an On Going Conference A participant whose audio channel is muted hears the other participants while the other participants cannot hear the muted participant Participants audio can be muted by the MCU by the operator by themselves or by a combination MCU operator Operator participant For listing of audio status icons see Table 3 4 Participant Audio Status Icons on page 3 16 Participants can mute their audio transmission from their own endpoints using DTMF codes The default DTMF
103. Participants Queue for assistance or was placed on hold during the On Going conference In this case the name of the Home conference is automatically displayed and selected in the conferences list Click this button to place the participant on hold When placed on hold the participant hears background music and an icon indicating that the participant is on hold is displayed in the Status column of the Monitor and Status panes In addition the participant icon in the Participants Queue window changes to On Hold Note When placing a participant on hold the waiting time in the queue is reset to zero Click this button to move the participant to the selected conference in the Conferences list This button is disabled when the Auto Attend Next Participant option is selected Click this button to attend the next participant listed in the Participants Queue sorted according to the Next By criteria Click this button to close the dialog box MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition you modify the shortcut key configuration the command button shortcut key display is updated accordingly e You cannot close the Attended Participant dialog box when a participant is being attended and is currently located in the Operator conference To close this window you must first move the participant from the Operator conference to the destination conference click the Move or To Home Conf button while clearing the Auto Attend Next Parti
104. Phone IP Connectio Channels Aggregation H Polycom Group H User B User Group 2 H pres International TW Video Overseas Eg Ouke K 172 22 13 Diakout g 79320 Dial out Auto Auto r Sag Michelle 172 22 13 Dial out fcaNedine 172 22 13 Diakin Q 2 K be Duke Knoop a k bg Frani 3 l ba Michelle 7 Nadine JE Default Audio ok J Default_video a 4 sw cp J video Switch g J weboffice_at p g g J weboffice_v1 5 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Right click the icon of the participant to copy and then click Copy Copy As Cul T Delete Del Dial In Ctrl I Link participant Properties The participant details are copied to the clipboard a To copy the participant under a new name click Copy As The Participant Properties dialog box opens b Change the participant s name and then click OK The participant s details will be copied to the clipboard under the new name In the Reservation database the On Going Conferences or Reservations list right click the conference icon to which you wish to copy the participant and then click Paste The participant s details will be copied to the new conference reservation under the same name a Alternatively click Paste As to copy the participant s details to the new conference reservation under a new name The Participant Properties dialog box opens
105. R Language for IVR ENGLISH x External Server Authentication Never sts Y Number of User Input Retries 3 Timeout for User Input 5 sec DTMF Delimiter Cancel Help 3 Define the following parameters Table 6 3 IVR Service Properties Global IVR Service Enter the name of the IVR Message Service Name Language for VR Select the language in which the audio messages and prompts will be heard The languages are defined in the IVR Properties dialog box For more details see page 6 10 6 18 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 6 3 IVR Service Properties Global Continued External Server You can configure the IVR Service to use an external Authentication database application such as WebOffice or WebCommander to verify participants permission to join the conference Select one of the following options to determine if the system should request authentication of an external server e Never to disable this option The participant s right to join the conference will not be verified with the external database application Upon Request to verify the chairperson password with an external database application only when the participant enters the chairperson identifier key pound or star All other participants are connected to the conference as standard undefined participants Always Any participant s request to join the conference will be validated using the exte
106. R Services are assigned at the conference level and different conferences may use different IVR Services or the same IVR Service may be used for all conferences The Entry Queue Service is a subset of the IVR Service and behaves in the same way An Entry Queue is a special routing lobby to which one or several dial in numbers are assigned Participants connect to this lobby and are routed to their destination conferences according to the conference Numeric ID or password that they enter using touch tone signals DTMF codes Different Entry Queues can be defined for video and Audio Only participants or the same video Entry Queue can be used by audio and video participants provided that the audio algorithm is set to G711 telephone standard Entry Queues remain in a passive state when there are no participants in the queue and they are automatically activated when a participant dials the Entry Queue number For more information on Entry Queue definition see Chapter 5 Meeting Rooms and Entry Queues Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants MCU Configuration and Audio Only Conferences The functional modules cards installed in the MCU determine what kind of conference can run on the MCU The Audio card is required to run IVR enabled conferences and Entry Queue and Audio Only conferences If no such card is available an error message is displayed when defining any of these conferences
107. Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Fiar 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2 2 27 2 29 3 31 1 t 94 5 6 a If you do not change the default date and time current the defined Reservation becomes an On Going Conference and will start immediately 5 Define the following parameters Table 2 7 Reservation Properties Scheduler Calendar Select a date on which the conference should be started select the month and year on the calendar and then click the date 2 42 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 2 7 Reservation Properties Scheduler Continued Starting Time To select a time at which the conference should be started set the starting time using either the 12H AM PM or the 24 hour format The time format is derived from the Operating System time format defined in the Regional Settings Highlight the hours or minutes in the box and either use the spin buttons to modify the displayed time or type a time directly Reservation Click this button to define a reservation for a Recurrence conference that will be repeated on a regular basis using the same basic parameters For more details refer to Defining Recurrent Reservations on page 2 44 6 Click the Settings tab The Conference Properties Settings dialog box appears 7 Define the Settings parameters as described for the On Going Conference Settings Parameters on page 2 21 8 Click the Participants tab to add defi
108. The participant is not connected to an external recording device e Dial up The participant is used as the recording port to an external device For more details see the MGC Manager User Guide Vol II Chapter 9 Recording Encryption Media information can be encrypted using an AES 128 algorithm The Encryption options are affected by the settings of the participant level flag in the system cfg For Audio Only participants connecting to an Audio Only conference with mixed networks Auto is automatically selected It implies the conference encryption setting encrypted non encrypted is applied to the participant Audio Only ISDN T1 CAS participants cannot be encrypted because encryption is not part of the ISDN T1 CAS protocol and therefore in this mode the participant can only connect as a standard participant to non encrypted conferences AGC The Auto Gain Control AGC mechanism regulates audio noise and volume by balancing the received signal to all participants AGC can be applied to all incoming audio streams prior to mixing thereby dynamically adjusting the amplification of the input signal AGC is automatically enabled for all participants Clear this check box to disable this option for the participant Save Participant These check boxes are the same as the check boxes that Participant Linked appear in the Properties Identification dialog box For more information see the description of the Save Participan
109. a Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Copy Participant Ctrl C Cut Ctrl x Delete Del Exclusive Speaker Q amp 4 Management gt Mute Audio Ctrl M Mute Video Block Audio Turn Off AGC Properties gt MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition The Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens Derek Properties In the Name field type the participant s new name Click OK The participant name is updated in the Browser Monitor and Status panes This name will also be saved to the CDR Call Detail Record file 4 9 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Changing the Disconnected Participant s Properties You can change several properties of a disconnected participant for example before reconnecting that participant These modifications can be performed in the Participant Properties dialog box Default Participant Properties Connection Info2 Disconnection Cause Resource Details ideansa Advanced Identiication Advanced Connection Infot Name Service Name Sub Service Name teamd isdn Connection Type Interface Type Num type Node Type Dialout g ISDN z Taken from service v Terminal Recording MCU Numbers Extension Identifier String None Encryption N AGC Meet me per Party hd User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Vol
110. aced on hold Click No to leave the participant on hold in the Participants Queue To place a participant On Hold 7 32 In the Attended Participant window click the Hold button Attended Participant Karen p Attened Participant Participant Name Karen I vip I Chair Person User Defined 1 User Defined 3 User Defined 2 User Defined 4 Disconnect Broadcasting Volume 5 fo Listening Volume 5 _ Apply r Operator o EA A C E N Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 Join End Join Mute Audio Conferences Search Value Search In Ongoing meetings bal Meeting Type Sep 18 2005 0 Ongoing Meeting Polycom Finance Sep 19 2005 0 Ongoing Meeting o New Conference Start Meeting Room IV Auto Attend Next Participant NestBy Time X I Include On Hold Participants To Home Conf F3 rur D Move F5 New TFB Coxe Alternatively press the selected shortcut key combination as it appears on the Hold button the default shortcut key is lt F4 gt When you place a participant on hold who is the last participant in the Participants Queue the following message appears MGC Manager a x This participant has been placed on hold and is the last participant in the queue Do you want to assist this participant Yes No Click Yes to attend a participant that was placed on hold Click No to leave the participant on hold in the Parti
111. ame or partially overlapping time frame when you save the conference on the MCU an error message is displayed requesting you to enter a different name Duration Define the duration of the conference using the format HH MM default 2 00 maximum 99 59 For example to define a duration of 30 minutes enter 0 30 For duration of 90 minutes enter 01 30 Setting the conference duration to 99 59 will cause the conference to be extended indefinitely when the Auto Extension mechanism is enabled For more details about the Auto Extension mechanism see MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 2 16 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 2 1 Conference Properties General Continued Billing Enter the conference billing code if one is allocated to the conference Note If a reservation system is used it can allocate a billing code The Billing code can also be defined by the conference chairperson or by means of the DTMF codes for the conference while the conference is running Displays the name of the MCU to which you are currently connected read only Conf Entry Enter a numeric password that participants will need to enter Password in order to access the conference If left blank the MCU automatically assigns the password to the conference once the conference definition is completed provided the MCU is configured to automatically assign passwords For more details about the MCU configuration see the MG
112. amount of time they have been waiting in the queue Requested Help Time Participants that have requested the operator s assistance are listed first and the list is sorted by time The remaining Standard participants are sorted according to the amount of time they have been waiting in the queue VIP Requested Help Time Participants identified as VIP are listed first and the VIP list is sorted by time Participants that have requested the operator s assistance are listed next The remaining Standard participants are sorted according to the amount of time they have been waiting in the queue 7 27 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing Table 7 6 Attended Participant Dialog Box Fields Continued Field Option Include On Hold Participants Select this check box to include participants placed on hold in the list of participants to which the Auto Attend Next Participant option applies When selected the participants placed on hold will be attended according to the selected sort order Next By as all other participants waiting in the queue When cleared participants placed on hold will not be automatically moved to the Operator conference for assistance and you have to manually select them in the Participants Queue To Home Conf F3 Click this button to move the participant back to his Hold F4 Move F5 Next F6 7 28 her Home conference when the participant was moved from the conference to the
113. ance is necessary to connect participants to conferences messages to the IVR Service For more information about adding new messages to the Entry Queue Service see Defining IVR Software Module Properties page 6 11 steps 5 8 b Adding messages to the Entry Queue Service is similar to adding 6 44 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition 7 Click Next The Conference ID dialog box opens Conference Id xi Name Message fle Request Conference Id Password confpass aca Join failure Message X Add Message File Request Conference 8 To assign the audio file to the message type click the appropriate table entry The message type appears at the bottom of the table and the drop down list displays the names of the audio files stored in the MGC unit s memory The following messages and prompts may be played to request the conference Numeric ID Password If the files were not downloaded prior to the definition of the Entry Queue Service or if you want to add new audio files click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC unit s memory Adding messages to the Entry Queue Service is similar to adding messages to the IVR Service For more information about adding new messages to the Entry Queue Service see page 6 10 Defining IVR Software Module Properties steps 5 8 Table 6 13 Entry Queue Properties Conference ID Request Select the audio file that prompts the p
114. ancy pane shows The maximum number of audio messages for each category that can be stored on the Audio card as configured in the system cfg file The number of audio files in each duration category that are currently stored on the Audio card 3 Click Close to exit the dialog box 6 51 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services Printing IVR DTMF Codes You can print the list of operations and their corresponding DTMF codes defined in the IVR Message Service Data may be sent to a printer saved to a file or copied to a clipboard The printed list includes the operation the input keys that are required and the type of permission for this operation chairperson only or everyone To print the list of DTMF codes 6 52 1 2 Expand the IVR Message Services tree Right click the icon of the IVR Message Service whose DTMF codes to print and then click Print IVR Data ad IVR Msg Services ela iag ES FE full v Set As Default Delete Del Copy Print IVR Data Properties The Print dialog box opens Name Of Operator Report To File Printer C ClipBoard Cancel _ In the Name Of Operator field enter the name of the operator who initiated the report optional From the Report To options select the destination to which the codes data is to be sent File To save the list of DTMF codes to a text file Printer To print the list of DTMF codes to the default printer
115. and AM lt 6 gt lt 3 gt CALCSTRMSTAT 19 63 67 12 05 32 116 N 6660448786 T G600006b L 26 64963628 CHdlcEve CHdlcEvent Trace Msg len 27 i RESOURCE TYPE BOARD ID UNIT ID CONNECTION ID CARD_AUDIO_PLUS_15_UIDEO_TYP_4 6 a opcode ASCII_MSG_IND ascii_msg not farmiliar v gt DisConnect CAPs INS NUM 4 cmd gt X HZ MCMS 172 22 188 40 PortOut 5003 TCP a The signal statistics are retrieved and are displayed in the Donkey COM window Look for these parameters in the following format Average Energy lt Energy gt Total VADS lt Total Vads gt Consecutive VADS lt Consecutive Vads gt If many messages are displayed wait two minutes and repeat step 8 Record the Energy Total Vads and Consecutive Vads values and locate these values in Table 6 17 on page 6 64 according to the Noise Environment whether the call was placed from a quiet room or a noisy environment such as a cellular phone Retrieve the corresponding parameter value Table 6 17 Noisy Line Tuning Table Noise Consecutive Parameter Environment WARS VADs Value 91 lt E lt 128 i V lt 50 Or 182 lt E lt 256 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 6 17 Noisy Line Tuning Table Noise fee Parameter 76 lt E lt 91 Quiet Vv lt 50 V lt 50 Or 152 lt E lt 182 67 lt E lt 76 Quiet Vv lt 50 V lt 50 Or 134 lt E lt 152 0 lt E lt 67 Quiet V lt 50 Or 128 lt E lt 134 91 lt E lt 128 Noisy V lt 50 Or
116. answer the call you can do one of the following Disconnect the invitee and continue dialing out to invite other individual by pressing 2 on your touch tone telephone Disconnect the invitee and return to the conference thus ending the Invite session by pressing 4 on your touch tone telephone Chairperson Initiated Dial out 4 72 Using the appropriate DTMF code the chairperson or the participant depending on the configured permission can indicate to the system when to start the dial out to multiple pre defined participants This option prevents the system from automatically dialing out to pre defined participants in a Meeting Room The chairperson can indicate to the system to connect all predefined dial out participants to the conference by entering the appropriate DTMF code 25 The DTMF code assigned to blast dial out operation may be configured in the IVR Message Service DTMF Codes dialog box For more details see Chapter 2 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Managing Secure Mode Conferences Roll Call In the Secure mode joining the conference monitoring or controlling the conference in any way is denied to outside participants including operators However operators can terminate the conference even in this mode In addition operators cannot view the participants list or any conference properties while the conference is in the Secure mode Chairpersons can enable or disable the Secure mod
117. aq Copy els Print IVR Data i Properties gt eles The IVR Message Service properties dialog box opens The tabs and options of this dialog box are described in Defining a New IVR Message Service on page 6 17 xi Conference Password General Operator Assistance Roll Call DTMF codes Global Welcome Message Conference Chairperson IVR Service Name Language for IVR Extemal Server Authentication Never Number of User Input Retries 3 Timeout for User Input 5 sec DTMF Delimiter Cancel 3 Modify the required parameters or download the required audio file 4 Click OK to apply the settings 6 39 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services Assigning IVR Services to Conferences IVR Message Services enable the conference participants and the chairperson to perform various operations from their endpoints using DTMF codes and and to utilize the SilenceIT and Roll Call features Assigning a defined IVR Service and all its options to a conference is done during the definition of a new On Going Conference or Reservation The selected IVR Service and its features and options cannot be modified or disabled during the On Going Conference To assign an IVR Service to an Audio Only conference When defining a new Audio Only conference in the Setting tab 1 In the General Settings pane click the Enable IVR Service check box 2 From the Message Service Name list select the name of the
118. articipant Name Karen r vie IT Chair Person User Defined 1 User Defined 3 User Defined 2 User Defined 4 Disconnect Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 Apply Operator Broadcasting Volume Listering Volume 5 Join EndJoin Mute Audio r Conferences Search Value Search In Ongoing meetings Sep 18 2005 0 Ongoing Meeting Polycom Finance Sep 19 2005 0 Ongoing Meeting Ej New Conference Stait Meeting Room T Auto Attend Next eer Next By fm S a J Include On Hold Participants _totone cot rs J Home Conf F3 Hold F4 Move Next F5 Alternatively press the selected shortcut key combination as it appears on the To Home Conf button the default shortcut key is lt F3 gt or see Moving a Participant to the Home Conference on page 7 37 for additional options When you move the presently attended participant to his her Home conference and he she is the last participant in the Participants Queue the following message appears MGC Manager x A The participants queue is empty If the Participants Queue includes only On Hold participants the following message is displayed MGC Manager E xi This participant has been placed on hold and is the last participant in the queue Do you want to assist this participant Yes No 7 31 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing Click Yes to attend a participant that was pl
119. articipant for Conference Id the conference Numeric ID or the conference Password password depending on the MCU configuration The Numeric ID or password is used to route the participant to the target conference 6 45 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services Oo 6 46 Table 6 13 Entry Queue Properties Conference ID Continued Join Failure Select the audio file that requests the participant to Message re enter the conference Numeric ID or password when failing to enter the correct conference Numeric ID or password 9 Click Next The Operator Assistance dialog box opens Operator Assistance x V Enable Operator Assistance Operator Assistance Indication Message OPERHELP AC Add Message File Disconnection Message GOODBYE ACA x Add Message File IV Enable Operator Assistance on Failure lt Back Cancel Help 10 Select Enable Operator Assistance to enable operator assistance when the participant waits in the IVR queue and during the conference 11 Select the messages to be played when the participant requests or is waiting for operator s assistance or when the participant fails to enter the correct conference password If the files were not downloaded prior to the definition of the Entry Queue Service or if you want to add new audio files click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC unit s memory Adding messages to the Entry Queue Service i
120. articipant level flag is set to NO only non encrypted participants can join the target conference 5 17 Chapter 5 Meeting Rooms and Entry Queues 5 18 To manually assign Dial in numbers to the Entry Queue The dial in phone numbers are assigned to the Entry Queue manually by the operator or automatically by the system These numbers are then communicated to the callers who connect to the conference The dial in numbers assigned to the ISDN Entry Queue are listed in the Dial in Numbers table The first column displays the Network Service name The Phone 1 and Phone 2 columns display the first and second phone numbers assigned to the Entry Queue If participants in the same Entry Queue use different Network Services such as two different ISDN services or an ISDN and T1 CAS service the conference can be assigned different phone numbers for each of the Network Services used In that case the manual allocation method is used e Up to 16 dial in phone numbers can be assigned to the Entry Queue e If no dial in number is assigned for this Entry Queue the system automatically assigns one using the dial in numbers defined in the ISDN PSTN T1 CAS Network Service 4 Click the plus pf button The Meet Me Service dialog box opens For instructions how to assign phone numbers to the conference see Manually Assigning Phone Numbers to the Conference on page 5 8 To delete an ISDN PSTN T1 CAS Network Service from the Entry
121. articipant properties were modified click this button to update the Participant Properties Identification parameters Broadcasting If necessary adjust the level of sound transmitted by Volume the operator to this participant Listening Volume If necessary adjust the level of sound heard by the operator Join This option enables the operator to join the conference for a short announcement To join a conference select the conference in the Conferences list and then click this button End Join Click this button to end the Join operation Mute Unmute Click this button to mute the operator s audio Audio Conferences Search Value Enter the first letters of a conference name or the information in one of the User Defined fields to determine the conferences to be listed according to the selected Search In criteria 7 24 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 7 6 Attended Participant Dialog Box Fields Continued Field Option Search In Conferences List New Conference Select the list to be used to search for the destination conference according to the Search Value e Ongoing meetings the system searches for the destination conference in the list of On Going Conferences running on the connected MCU Ongoing meetings 12h reservations the system searches for the destination conference in the list of On Going Conferences and Reservations scheduled to start in the next 12 hours on the connec
122. as a Meet Me Per Conference or Meeting Room The conference dial in number is given to all the conference participants who use it to directly connect to the conference Using this mode any participant who dials the conference number can connect to the conference until all the MCU resources are utilized or the maximum number of participants is reached The Meet Me Per conference is the basis for the Meeting Rooms definition Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants H 323 participants dial the IP Network Service Prefix and the conference numeric ID To simplify matters the Network Service Prefix and the ISDN number prefix can be set to be the same number as the local phone exchange e g 925 and the conference Numeric ID can be a four digit number matching the ISDN number allocated to the conference e g 1222 so participants who dial 9251222 connect to conferencel SIP participants connecting within the organization dial the conference name or numeric ID For example Conferencel or 1222 Such a conference may be defined as Standard with Meet Me per Conference and Allow Undefined Participants selected No Entry Queue Access or IVR e Meeting Room with Allow Undefined Participants selected No Entry Queue Access or IVR For more information about Meet Me per Conference and Meeting Rooms see Chapter 5 Defining a New Audio Only Meeting Room on page 5 4 Queue dial in number may b
123. as to wait for their turn to speak Removed from Played to the participant that was removed from the Q amp A Q amp A queue Next Q amp A Indicates to the participant who is next in the Q amp A Questioner queue to prepare to ask a question Secure ON Played to the conference when the chairperson secured the conference so it cannot be entered by additional participants or by operator In this mode the operator cannot monitor the participants and can only terminate the conference Note Conferences are secured and unsecured by the chairperson via DTMF commands Secure OFF Played to the conference when the chairperson cancelled the secured mode and the conference returned to its normal state Requires Played to inform participants that the conference will not Chairperson start until the chairperson joins the conference Note This message is played only when the Start Confy Requires Chairperson option is selected in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box First to Join the Played to the participant who is first to join the Cont conference to clarify the silence Conference Played to dial in participants when they try to connect to Locked a locked conference 6 26 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 6 7 IVR Service Properties General Messages Continued Message Type Message Description Mute All ON Played to the conference to inform all participants that they are all muted except t
124. at ID Dial in Number Entry Password Numeric Id H323 Service Prefix ee Feb 04 2 14633 7777 Feb 04 2 14625 For a description of the Status and Monitor pane columns see MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Undefined Dial in ISDN Participants Undefined ISDN participants dial in to a conference directly using the dial in number provided by the conference organizer or the MGC Manager operator If necessary add the country code and area code Chapter 1 VoicePlus Overview Oo Undefined Dial in H 323 Participants Undefined participants connect to the conference by entering the IP Network Service Prefix and the Entry Queue conference Numeric ID or name in the following format IP Network Service Prefix Numeric ID Name For conferences defined as Meet Me per Conference or Meeting Rooms the Network Service prefix is displayed in the Status pane of the MGC Manager Dial in SIP Participants SIP participants can connect directly to a conference by entering the conference URI in the format name domain name The SIP address is displayed in the Network Service Properties dialogue box DNS Settings tab Local Domain Name field Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants About Conferences The MGC unit enables you to run different types of conferences use different scheduling methods and provide different methods of connecting to the conference Conference Scheduli
125. ault however if you do not see them you can configure the Participant Properties dialog box to include them and you can also modify their titles This is done in the Database Manager application For more details about changing the User Defined fields see MGC Manager User s Guide Vol I Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences To modify the User Defined fields in participant s properties 1 Open the Participant s Properties Identification dialog box and enter any required general information about the participant into any or all of the User Defined fields Planning Dept 1 Properties Connection Info2 H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Advanced Connection Infot Name Planning Dept 1 Connection Type Interface Type Dial out E H323 bd Participant IP Signaling Port 25 2 25 255 1720 Alias Name Alias Type john H323 ID gt Extension Identifier String User Defined 1 Planning Dept head User Defined 3 User Defined 2 local office User Defined 4 Broadcasting Volume 5 2 Click OK The information is updated 4 21 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Conference Level Operations Adding New Participants to a Conference 4 22 Lg Occasionally you may be required to add a defined participant after a conference has begun To do this you can use one of the following methods Define a new partic
126. automatically mute all undefined dial in participants once they are connected to the conference The participants can then be individually unmuted by the operator or the conference chairperson through the WebCommander Note Valid for Meet Me Per Conference Meeting Rooms and Entry Queue Access conferences and reservations Select this option to indicate that the conference will only start when the participant defined as a chairperson connects to the conference The amount of time the conference waits for the chairperson to connect before it is automatically terminated is defined by a flag in the system cfg file Participants who connect to the conference while waiting for the chairperson to connect are automatically placed on hold and hear background music When the check box is cleared the conference will start at its predefined time or when the first participant connects to it Note This option is enabled only when an IVR Service is assigned to the conference Select this option to automatically end the conference once the conference chairperson disconnects from the conference After the chairperson exits the conference the conference shuts down Note This option is enabled only when an IVR Service is assigned to the conference Select this option to automatically end the conference as defined by the Before First Join and After Last Quit fields Empty conferences still use resources that were reserved for them By ending
127. aviannavae 2 1 On Demand Conferencing ooo eee eeeeceeeeceeeeeeeaeeaeeeeens 2 1 Attended and Unattended Conferences 0 0 0 seeseeseeseceteeeeeneees 2 2 Unattended Conference 000 0 ceeceeceeseeseceseeeneeeseeneeeneeeneenreeaees 2 3 Attended Conference seccescessevssvascessevencestaecduasesteusevenseasseaseeates 2 3 Conference Types s ccccsscecsctitacedtesnaniosnescassdcccseesstossubosdscdueesvesves 2 4 IVR and Entry Queue Services eeeeseesceseceseceecesceseceaeeeaeeneees 2 5 MCU Configuration and Audio Only Conferences 2 6 Participant RIES si cscisisssscccesnecteecenscsucsaescteceabenversieteveseccssatsauiaevessaceves 2 7 Participant Connection to Conference cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 8 Participant Connection Types 00 cceeeeeecessseseeeceeeseeeeeeees 2 8 Conference Access for Dial in Participants 0 00 eee 2 8 UVR ACCESS aecusevisesecesseuncenveescaveviavieueccaveeuiseiseunseniccuventiensceavee 2 12 Table of Contents Conference Access for Dial out Participants 0 eee 2 13 Defining New On Going Audio Conferences 0 eee eects 2 14 General Properties siisii suosisi isese 2 16 Settings Parameters cs sessisesccssecsisssserdesescsesecntessdsoasersecdaviedesestowdss 2 21 Participants ssns ensien e a aea aE aiei 2 28 RECOrdINE eian am eias e se aea EEN NANEN EENE e OE Sia 2 35 Completing the Conference Definition eee 2 36 Resolving Scheduling Conflicts 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 2 37 Listing On Going Conf
128. bled when defining an IP Only Entry Queue If this table is left empty the MCU automatically assigns the dial in number Enabling Encryption for Entry Queues To be able to join a conference from an Entry Queue as an encrypted participant the Entry Queue must be encrypted All non encrypted participants connecting to this Entry Queue are disconnected from the MCU Encrypted participants can be moved from an encrypted Entry Queue to the destination conference depending on the destination conference settings and the setting of the participant level flag in the system cfg file If the target conference is encrypted and the participant level flag is set to YES encrypted and non encrypted participants can join the target conference In such a case participants from an encrypted Entry Queue and from non encrypted Entry Queue can join the encrypted conference If the target conference is encrypted and the participant level flag is set to NO only encrypted participants can join the target conference In such a case participants from an encrypted Entry Queue can be moved to the target conference If the target conference is not encrypted and the participant level flag is set to YES encrypted and non encrypted participants can join the target conference In such a case participants from an encrypted Entry Queue and from non encrypted entry queue can join the non encrypted conference If the target conference is not encrypted and the p
129. by the MCU Access this tab if you want to define the number of participants for which the system should save resources and the maximum number of participants allowed to connect to this conference If the Max Participants option is set to Auto the number of participants that can connect to the conference is limited by the availability of MCU resources 5 5 Chapter 5 Meeting Rooms and Entry Queues 8 Click the Meet Me Per Conf tab The Meet Me Per Conf dialog box opens Properties Product Management xj General Settings Participants Meet Me Per Conf Recording Meeting Room J Limited Sequences Number of Oecurences 1 p Meet Me Service ISDN Service E ISDN Network Servi Diakin Number 1 H 323 Service e H 323 Network Servi H 323 Service Prefix Cancel Apply Help The Meet Me Per Conference option allows participants to connect to a conference by simply dialing a pre defined conference number Up to 16 ISDN PSTN T1 CAS dial in numbers usually one or two phone numbers can be assigned to the conference Participants must dial one of these numbers to automatically connect to the appropriate conference If you intend to manually allocate a dial in number to the conference you can check the ISDN T1 CAS Network Service for the dial in numbers that can be allocated to conferences tab If the Entry Queue Access is selected for the conference and you are using
130. casting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 f f boric L AA RN f J F Audio Oriy F vip F Audio Only F vip OK Cancel Apply OK Cancel Apply Connected H 323 participant Identification tab Connected SIP participant Identification tab MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition The following Identification parameters can be modified for a connected participant Table 3 13 VoIP Participant Properties Identification Indicates the participant s name User Defined 1 4 Place to enter additional data about the participant for example the email address telephone number or any other identifying information Broadcasting The volume at which the participant is heard by other Volume participants If not modified the volume stays at the default level 5 Listening Volume The volume at which the participant hears other participants If not modified the volume stays at the default level 5 Indicates whether the participant is defined as a VIP If required modify the following parameters change the participants name by entering a new name in the Name field enter information in any or all User Defined fields adjust the broadcasting listening volume using the slider change the VIP status by selecting or clearing the VIP check box For more information on the Identification and Advanced parameters that can be modified during an On
131. cated you can move the participant to that conference or place the participant on hold If the Auto Attend Next Participant check box is selected the next participant waiting in the Participants Queue is automatically moved to the Operator conference when the current attended participant is moved out of the Operator conference either to the destination conference placed on hold or disconnected The following parameters and functions are displayed in the Attended Participants dialog box Table 7 6 Attended Participant Dialog Box Fields Attended Participant Participant Name If the participant is undefined the system assigned participant name is displayed in this field Type the name of the participant using up to 80 characters VIP Select this check box to change the participant status to VIP Chairperson Select this check box to designate this participant as the conference Chairperson MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 7 6 Attended Participant Dialog Box Fields Continued User Defined 1 4 In any or all of the four User Defined fields enter Title general information for the participant such as the participant s email address telephone number company name location or any required information The titles of the User Defined fields can be modified in the Database Manager gt Defaults gt User Defined Defaults and loaded to the MGC Manager application For details of defining the titles
132. ce Indicates the position held by the participant in the Q amp A Queue 1 being the next to speak 2 being second up and so on This information is cleared when the participant begins to speak Displays the total time spent by the participant waiting in the Q amp A Queue This information is cleared when the participant begins to speak During a voting session displays the last vote that the selected participant entered using DTMF code Indicates whether the participant is in an Invite Session The Invite option is available in Audio Only Conferences and enables the chairperson to dial out during an On Going Conference to a participant inviting them to join Displays Invite for the chairperson and the invited participant MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Additional Participant Statuses Table 3 3 lists additional participant icons that are displayed when the participant is connected to an VR enabled conference If none of these statuses occur the Status column in the Status pane remains empty These statuses are primarily used in attended conferences Table 3 3 Participant in VR enabled Conference Status Icons Ce The participant is connected to the MCU and has entered the Entry Queue or the IVR queue The participant was moved to the Operator Conference and is being assisted by the operator The participant has requested the operator s assistance The participant has reque
133. ce They hear a Welcome message and are then moved to the Participants Queue where they wait for the operator to connect them to the conference Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing Attended In the Attended stage participants are moved to the Operator conference where after a short conversation with the participant the operator moves each participant to the appropriate conference Home conference or places them on hold An Operator conference is a conference that allows the operator and one participant to talk without disturbing the On Going Conference For more details see Managing Attended Participants from the Browser Status and Monitor Panes on page 7 34 On Hold In the On Hold stage participants wait in the Participant s Queue where they hear background music view the same Welcome video slide and wait for the operator s assistance Participants are also placed on hold and moved to the Participant s Queue when they enter the wrong conference Numeric ID while in the Entry Queue or the wrong password This option must be enabled in the Entry Queue or the IVR Service and an Operator conference must be running on the MCU Conferencing In the Conferencing stage the participant is already connected to the On Going Conference During the conference operator assistance can be requested via DTMF codes but only if it is already configured in the IVR Service assigned to the conference For information about configuring IVR S
134. ce and modify its parameters if required using the Conference Properties option Participant Level Monitoring You can view detailed information on the participant s status using the Participant Properties option During attended conferences you can monitor the status of the participants waiting in the Participants Queue This chapter describes the available options and methods of monitoring Audio Only conferences in the MGC Audio Look and Feel mode according to monitoring levels and according to the type of participant or the type of connection to the conference When the Audio Look and Feel mode is set for the system the video parameters are hidden but you can still monitor video conferences if they are run on any of the connected MCUs The Audio Look and Feel mode is set in the Options menu For more details refer to the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 5 Audio Look and Feel 3 1 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences General Monitoring Monitoring a conference enables you to keep track of its participants and its progress When monitoring a conference you can check whether all its participants are correctly connected and whether errors and faults have occurred The MGC Manager allows operators to monitor several On Going Conferences simultaneously Conference chairpersons can monitor only the conference to which they are connected by using the WebCommander application You can use the MGC Manager to mon
135. cipant Participant Name T ve I Chait Person User Defined 1 User Defined 3 Attended participant User Defined 2 OOOO O Uei SSS o o Disconnect parameters Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 Uperator Broadcasting Volume S Listening Volumef5 Operator options on EndJoin Mute Audio Conferences Search Value Search In Ongoing meetings X Conference Name Numericld User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 Start Time Meeting Type Sep 18 2005 0 Ongoing Meeting Sep 19 2005 0 Ongoing Meeting 4CIF 2228 budget 2930 Polycom Finance Conferences list Kil New Conference Start Mesino Foo IF Auto Attend Next Participant Newey Time z F Include On Hold Participante To Home Conf F3 Hold F4 Move F5 Next F6 Close Action options 7 21 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing 7 22 In the Attended Participant box enter the participant name and general information User Defined fields change the participant status to VIP and or chairperson and modify the listening and broadcasting volumes In the Operator box you can modify your listening and broadcasting volumes In the Conferences box you can list all the On Going Conferences Meeting Rooms and Reservations depending on the selected listing criteria and search the list for the required destination conference Once the destination conference is lo
136. cipant check box e Initially the command buttons are displayed with the default shortcut keys If Moving the Attended Participant to the Destination Conference Two options are available to connect the participant to the destination conference e Move To Home Conf To connect a participant to his her destination conference In the Conferences box of the Attended Participant window select the destination conference of the attended participant and then click the Move button Attended Participant Karen E xi Attened Participant Participant Name Karen F vip I Chair Person User Defined 1 User Defined 3 User Defined 2 User Defined 4 Disconnect Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 Apply Operator Broadcasting Volume Listening Volume 5 Jon __Erdicin _ Muteducio Conferences Search Value Search In Ongoing meetings x 5 ing oor IV Auto Attend Next Participant Next By Time X I Include On Hold Participants To Home Cont F3 Hold F4 ene Se NEA FE Close The participant moves to the selected conference Alternatively press the selected shortcut key combination as it appears on the Move button the default shortcut key is lt F5 gt or see Chapter 4 7 29 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing 7 30 Moving a Participant from one Conference to Another for additional options If the participant s conference is not
137. cipant to the Browser pane and drop it on the Operator Conference icon To drag and drop a participant to the Home conference 1 Expand the On Going Conferences list in the Browser pane to display the Home Conference icon 2 Drag the icon of the participant to the Browser pane and drop it on the Home Conference icon Moving Multiple Participants to the Home Conference 7 44 When several participants are placed on hold they can all be selected using standard Windows multi selection options and then moved to the appropriate conference together To move several participants who are on hold to the Home Conference 1 List the participants who are on hold in the appropriate conference or in the Participants Queue tree or the Participants Queue window 2 Select the participants that are on hold MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Move the selected participants to their destination conferences using one of the following methods a Using the To Home Conference option in the right click menu Right click the icon of one of the highlighted participants and then click To Home Conf Using the Move option in the right click menu Right click the icon of one of the highlighted participants and then click Move A list of conferences appears Click the name of the conference to which to move the participants Using the Participants Queue toolbar Click the icon of one of the highlight
138. cipants in Audio Only and Video conferences This feature is enabled for conferences with IVR Service during the conference setup reservation stage using the Conference Properties Settings tab option For a detailed description see Chapter 6 Using SilencelT on page 6 7 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Participants Queue This window lists participants who are waiting for the operator s assistance It provides tools for managing participants in attended conferences For more details see Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing Conference Level Monitoring In addition to the general conference information that appears in the Status and the Monitor tables you can view the details of the conference current status and setup parameters using the Conference Properties dialog boxes While checking the properties you can also edit several parameters To view the parameters of an On Going Conference 1 Inthe Status pane Browser pane or Monitor pane right click the icon of the conference and then click Properties The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Polycom Properties Product Management x som Smci Yt Participan Ongoing State Meet Me Per Conf Recording Name Polycom Conf Entry Password 272372 Duration 200 Web Chaitperson Password 126710 Billing Numeric ID 1958 User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 r Supported Network GIP Video Audio
139. cipants Queue MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Operator Joining a Conference An operator can join a conference for a short announcement or to check the conference status To join a conference as operator In the Conferences box of the Attended Participant window select the conference you want to join and then click the Join button in the Operator box Attended Participant Michelle x m Attened Participant Participant Name Michelle M vip T Chait Person User Defined 1 User Defined 3 User Defined 2 i User Defined 4 Disconnect Broadcasting Volume 5 J Listening Volume 5 o Apply p Operator Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volumef5 r p Conferences ie Soarch Value Searchin Ongoing meetings v Conference Name Numeric Id ji User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 Start Time Meetin Audio 1 1012 Dec 10 2003 1 Ongoir Product Manage 2557 Polycom Sales Targets Dec 10 2003 1 Ongoir gi 2 I Auto Attend Next Participant NextBy Time TZ Include On Hold Patticipants To Home Cont F3 Hold F4 Move F5 Neare Cio The operator joins the selected conference Attended participants remain in the operator conference until the operator returns to the operator conference and moves them or places them on hold To end the Join state of the operator In the Operator box of the Attended Participant window click the End
140. conference data to a text file in the desired directory The system assigns the conference name as the default file name b Select the destination folder enter the required file name then click OK 4 60 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition If Printer is selected the conference data is printed to the default printer using the printer s current settings If Clipboard is selected the conference data is copied to the clipboard from where it can be pasted in other text handling applications Following is a sample of Reservation or Conference information The first section lists the Reservation general parameters and the second section lists the participant s parameters Operator Data Operator Name Lynne Reservation Data Reservation Name Demo Id 994 Conf Entry Password 1234 Web Chairperson Password 1122 Start Time Jan 13 2003 06 31 12 AM Duration 02 00 00 Audio Alg 56 G711 IVR Service Enabled Yes IVR Service Name Demo Operator Conference No Audio Mix Depth 3 Participants Sarat Connection Type Dial Out Interface Type ISDN Service Name e1 SubService Name ZERO Participant Phone Number s 9054631645 Num Type Taken from service Channel Width 64 kbps Number of Channels 1 Bonding Mode Off Chair No Voice Node Type Terminal Restrict Only No Connection Type Dial Out Interface Type ISDN Service Name e1 SubService Name ZER
141. conference you are trying to CUFLOCKD ACA Destination join is locked conference is locked General Billing Please enter the Billing code BILLING ACA code request Press the pound key when during on going complete conference 6 56 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 6 16 Default IVR Messages Continued Message Type Message Text FileName General Self mute You are now muted SELFMUTE ACA indication General Self You are no longer muted MUTEEND ACA unmute indication General Max The conference is full You cannot CNFFULL ACA number of Conf join at this time participants exceeded General Add me Please wait and you will be QAADD ACA to Q amp A queue prompted to ask your question confirmation General Remove You have been removed from the QAREM ACA me from Q amp A Question and Answer queue queue confirmation General Next It is now your turn to speak please QAASK ACA participant in Q amp A ask your question queue announcement Grant permission to ask General The conference is being recorded RCRDCONF ACA Recording indication General The conference recording has RCRDFAIL ACA Recording failure failed indication 6 57 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 6 16 Default IVR Messages Continued General The available touch tone keypad LDRHP1A ACA Chairperson Help action
142. conferences can be set as Unattended or Attended mode All conferences are set as Unattended unless the Attended mode is selected in the IVR Service or Entry Queue Service when selecting the On Hold for Operator MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Assistance option When selected callers must wait for the operator to connect them to the conference In IVR enabled conferences in both Attended and Unattended modes the participants or meeting organizer can control certain aspects of the conference Operator assistance is available upon request Unattended Conference An unattended conference is usually a reservationless conference that is started by the first participant who connects to the conference This type of conference is set up once to be activated by the participants when required Although an operator is not needed for this conference one can be on hand In an unattended conference it is the conference chairperson who controls all features and functions of the conference either by means of the touch tone telephone another DTMF input device or through the Internet using the WebCommander application Conference participants can perform simple operations such as muting or unmuting their lines or modifying their volumes from their touch tone telephone or DTMF input device Actions that can be performed by the participants or the chairperson are defined in the IVR Service that is assigned to that conference Attended Con
143. cording to the conference Numeric ID or password depending on the MCU configuration an Entry Queue Service must be assigned to the Entry Queue Assigning is done during the definition of a new Entry Queue in the Entry Queue Properties dialog box To assign the Entry Queue Service to an Audio only conference e Inthe Entry Queue Properties dialog box in the Entry Queue Message Service list select the required Entry Queue Service or leave this box empty to use the default Entry Queue if one is defined xl r Entry Queue Settings Name Team Queue Numeric ID M AdHoc Profile AudioHO id m Target Conferences IV Audio Only T IP Only Entry Queue Service RUCE EEEE 3 Target Conference Settings Audio Alg 56 G711 T Encryption Dial in Number 1 Dialin Number 2 Cancel Message Service but not both If an IVR Service is selected as default you must You can set either an IVR Service or an Entry Queue Service as the default VR assign an Entry Queue Service here 6 48 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Connecting to a Conference from an Entry Queue Lg When a conference is accessed through an Entry Queue and an IVR Service is assigned to the conference the connection to the conference is made in two stages In the first stage the participants connect to the Entry Queue where they are routed to their
144. ction and Message Secure conference To switch the conference to secure mode press star seven one Unsecure conference To cancel the secure mode press pound seven one Increase my broadcasting volume To increase your volume press star nine Decrease my broadcasting volume To decrease your volume press pound nine Mute All but me To mute all participants except yourself press star five Cancel Mute All but me To cancel mute settings of all participants except yourself press pound five Change password To change the chairperson or conference password press star seven seven Place conference on hold To place the conference on hold press star one Reinstate on hold conference To reinstate a conference on hold press pound one Mute dial in participants To mute dial in participants press star eight six Cancel Mute dial in participants To cancel the muting of dial in participants press pound eight six Start voting session To vote press star eight one Stop voting session To end a voting session and get the results press pound eight one Chairperson Chairperson Everyone Everyone Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 4 4 DTMF Operations Performed During Conference Continued DTMF Function and Message earn
145. ctions PSTN ISDN or T1 CAS lines cellular phones or VoIP H 323 or SIP These conferences allow the use of VoicePlus capabilities When the Audio Look and Feel mode is set for the MGC Manager the video parameters are hidden but you can still monitor video conferences if they are run on any of the connected MCUs 1 1 Chapter 1 VoicePlus Overview About the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition The VoicePlus Edition includes information required to set up and monitor On Going Audio Only Conferences Audio Only reservations define Audio Only participants and configure the IVR modules If you are new to the Polycom MCU and MGC Manager we recommend that you read the appropriate Getting Started Guide that accompanies your unit The other volumes of the MGC Manager User Guides documentation set describe setting up and monitoring multipoint video conferences and combined audio video conferencing They describe performing system configuration activities for the MGC Multipoint Control Units MCUs to which it connects This user s guide provides references to related topics in other volumes of our documentation as relates to each topic User s Guide Conventions 1 2 The following terms and conventions are used in this Guide e Open or Double click is used to open files and applications Double click can also expand a tree or open a dialog box e Select or Click is used to highlight a par
146. currence is done using the Reservation right click menu Recurring reservations can be deleted as a group using one of the following methods Using the Recurrent Reservation right click menu Using the Reservations right click menu To delete a single recurring reservation 1 2 Right click one of the Recurrent Reservation icons and click Delete Reservations 8 New Participant FS Copy Res Paste Par Delete Delete All Reservation recurrences Print Reservation Properties A confirmation box opens Click Yes to delete the selected recurring reservation The deleted reservation is removed from the recurrences list 4 57 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences To delete all recurring reservations Using the Recurrent Reservation right click menu a Right click one of the Recurrent Reservation icons and then click Delete All Reservation Recurrences Reservations a ie PEE New Participant F8 SB eG Paste Par Girly ee Paste Pat Gtri P EE Delete BS Delete All Reservation recurrences ea Print Reservation ea Properties A confirmation box opens b Click Yes to delete all recurring reservations All the recurrences of the selected Recurrent Reservation are removed Using the Reservations right click menu a Right click the Reservations icon click Delete All Reservation Recurrences
147. d at the same time in one operation to the conference In addition a participant in an On Going Conference can be placed on hold when he she is to be excluded from the conference for a short period To do so you have to first move the participant from the conference to the Operator conference and then place him her on hold To place a participant on Hold in the Operator conference Standard MS Windows multiple selection techniques can be used in the following procedure MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition 1 Inthe Browser Status or Monitor pane display the list of participants in the Operator conference 2 Right click the icon of the participant to be placed on hold and then click Hold 3 m Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Move Participant gt Copy Participant Ctrl C Cut Ctrl X Delete Del Exclusive Speaker Q amp A Management gt Attend FZ To Home Conf F3 Mute Audio Ctrl M Mute Video Block Audio Turn Off AGC Properties The Participant icon changes to Hold in the Status column of the Home conference participants list in the Monitor and Status panes and in the Participants Queue To place a participant on hold in the Participants Queue tree or the Participants Queue window 1 Display the list of participants in the Participants Queue in the Browser or Status pane or in the Participants Queue window 2 Right click the icon of the participant to be placed on hold and then c
148. d name or Record to record the name again Note This message is optional and is not played to the participant when the appropriate flag in the system cfg is set to NO Roll Call Enter to A voice message added to the playback of the recorded Conference name stating that the participant has joined the conference has joined the conference Roll Call Exit A voice message added to the playback of the recorded from Conference name stating that the participant has left the conference has left the conference MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 6 9 IVR Service Properties Roll Call Messages Continued Roll Call Message Description Roll Call Start Played when Roll Call is requested by the chairperson Names Review introducing the names of the conference participants in the order they joined the conference Roll Call End Played at the end of Roll Call to indicate that the listing Names Review of participant names is concluded 23 Click Next The SilencelT dialog box opens x Enable SilencelT J7 SilencelT Menu falmuteaca Add Message File 17 Unmute and Retum to Conference sinunmtr aca x J Return to Conference Muted n gt Unmute Reminder E I Adjust SilencelT Sensitivity and Unmute m I Disable SilencelT and Unmute M eee 7 Participant Detected as Noisy 7 Addi Roll Call dependant option Add Message File Add Message File l
149. dio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants Participant Connection to Conference Participant connection to a conference is determined by the connection type dial in or dial out conference type Attended Unattended and service IVR Entry Queue Meet Me Per Conference Participant Connection Types Conference participants can connect to the conference by calling the conference dial in or when the conference initiates the call to the participant dial out at the beginning of or during the On Going Conference Conferences can include only dial in participants only dial out participants or both kinds of participants Dial in Participant In a conference that includes dial in participants the participants may be defined in advance and identified by their Calling Line Identifier CLI number IP address or alias once they connect to the conference The conference can include anonymous undefined participants who were not defined by the operator or meeting organizer prior to the conference start They connect to the conference if they dial the conference dial in number and have entered the appropriate password if one was assigned to the conference or by means of an Entry Queue Conferences that include undefined dial in participants must be defined as Standard Meet Me Per Conference or Meeting Room conferences Dial out Participant In a conference that includes dial out participants participants can be called individua
150. discontinue the conference temporarily and return to it later On the other hand deleting a participant completely removes all participant information from the conference and releases the resources that were allocated to that participant making them available for other participants However to reconnect a participant who was deleted from the conference you must define the parameters again as you would do for a new participant To disconnect a participant 1 In the Monitor pane Status pane or Browser pane list the participants connected to the conference 2 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Right click the icon of the participant to disconnect and then click Disconnect Participant a Alan Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Copy Participant Ctrl C Cut Ctrl x Delete Del Exclusive Speaker Q amp A Management Mute Audio Ctrl M Turn Off AGC Properties The participant is disconnected from the conference but the resources remain allocated in case the participant is reconnected The participant status and icon change to Disconnected in the Connection column To reconnect a disconnected participant right click the participant icon and then click Connect Participant To delete a participant 1 Right click the icon of the participant to delete and then click Delete or press the lt Del gt key mi Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Copy Participant Ctrl C Cut Ctrl X Delete De
151. displayed in the Status column in the Monitor and Status panes The conference is now locked to new dial in participants To unlock a locked conference expand the On Going Conferences list right click the icon of the conference to unlock and then click Unlock Conference The status of this conference in the Monitor and Status panes is updated to Unlocked and the conference reverts to its regular state New dial in participants can now connect to the On Going Conference Using the Conference toolbar a Expand the On Going Conferences list and then click the icon of the conference to lock b Click the Lock Conference button on the Conference toolbar 0 0 4 33 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences The Locked Conference icon and the Lock button lal on the Conference toolbar indicate that the conference is now locked to new dial in participants Placing a cursor on top of the Lock button displays a tooltip with the operation that will be performed once the button is clicked aa MCUs Network Status Product Management Norma g MCU Configuration Eaa 13 tone a On Going Conferences 2 ST amp Participants Queue 0 Reservations 0 H B Meeting Rooms Entry Queug To unlock a locked conference expand the On Going Conferences list click the icon of the conference to unlock and then click the Unlock Conference button on the Conference toolbar The
152. displays the Reservations in Database window when starting the MGC Manager application every time the application opens unless you close Reservations Database window If you close it it will not automatically reopen unless you manually open it and leave it open You can access the Reservations Database window by clicking Reservations in AccordDB from the Window menu Using the default Reservation templates you can schedule a conference to start immediately On Going Conference or to start automatically at a predefined date and time Reservation MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition To start an On Going Conference from a default Reservation template 1 2 Display the Reservations Database window ioixi E O Root Name Phone 1P Connection Type _ Channels Aggregation H Default 5 My Group kn Default Audio 4 Default_coP fob Default_Video iG SW CP SEA video Switch H UserGroups 1 accorp Administration H O operator H 3 Operator gt Operator Audio a a If the Reservations Database window is closed open it For a detailed description of the Reservations Database window see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 3 Default Reservation Templates b Ifthe Reservations in Database window is hidden behind other windows display it on top of the MGC Manager Main window On the Window menu click Reservations in lt database name gt
153. dition Scheduling a New Reservation A Reservation is a conference that is scheduled to start sometime in the future It is saved on the MCU and is automatically started when the scheduled date and time arrives At the end of the conference it is deleted from the MCU To schedule a new Reservation 1 Expand the MCU tree 2 Right click the Reservations icon and then click New Reservation BS FReservations 1 New Reservation New Operator Reservation Print All Paste Crity Site The Conference Properties General dialog box opens allowing you to define the general parameters of the conference These parameters are identical to the standard conference General parameters 3 Define the conference general parameters such as name Numeric ID passwords and duration For detailed description of these parameters refer to Table 2 1 Conference Properties General on page 2 16 4 Click the Scheduler tab to schedule the conference start date and time The conference will automatically start at the defined date and time 2 41 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants The Properties Scheduler dialog box opens By default the system displays the current time as the start time of the conference Properties Product Management x General Scheduler Settings Participants Recording Starting Date EE December 2004 JO Seirus 10 00AM
154. e then expand the Reservations tree The reserved conferences are listed in the Browser pane below the Reservations icon Reservations 2 ee res psa Sales The number of currently defined reservations appears between brackets next to the Reservations icon Each conference is identified by its name and an icon indicating the Reservation type and status You can view Reservations in the Status pane to check additional information about the Reservation such as its Numeric ID passwords dial in numbers and H 323 Network Service Prefix Displaying the List of Reservations in the Status Pane Expand the MCU tree and in the Status pane and click the Reservations EE Polycom Sales_ 1 O K Oct 30 2003 05 00 00 PM 02 00 00 2272 100 2501 005418 028345 EE Polycom Sales_ 2 O K Oct 31 2003 05 00 00 PM 02 00 00 2273 100 2501 005418 028345 E security 1 O K Oct 30 2003 06 00 00 PM 02 00 00 2278 1735 EE securty 2 OK Nov 30 2003 06 00 00 PM 02 00 00 2279 1735 EE transitions 2 O K Nov 06 2003 04 30 00 PM 02 00 00 2277 1759 008405 007253 2 47 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants End of Conference Reminder At a certain time during a conference the End of Conference Reminder ah icon can appear in the Status or Monitor panes reminding you the operator that the conference is due to end You can then extend the duration of the conference if necessary The time interval betwee
155. e Home conference using one of the following options a Using the Move option in the right click menu Right click the icon of the participant to be moved to the Home conference and then click Move A list of conferences appears am Attend F2 Attend With Details Hold To Home Conf Audio 1 F3 Audio 1 Operator Guidance Delete Del Stop Monitoring Click the name of the Home Conference to which to move the participant b Using the To Home Conference option in the right click menu Right click the icon of the participant to be moved to the Home conference and then click To Home Conf Move Operator Guidance gt To Home Conf Audio 1 F3 gt Delete Del Stop Monitoring 7 39 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing 7 40 The participant connects to the Home conference and is removed from the Participants Queue and or the Operator conference The Attended or Hold icon in the Status column of the Monitor and Status panes disappears Placing a Participant On Hold A participant can be placed on hold while in the Participants Queue or when participating in an Operator conference Usually the participant waiting in the Entry Queue or Participants Queue is first assisted by the operator and is then placed on hold until all the participants pertaining to the same conference are assisted and placed on hold Once all the participants are on hold they can all be connecte
156. e MCU Note If the MCU is configured to support only the automatic assignment of Numeric IDs this field is disabled and the system automatically assigns a Numeric ID after you save the new Entry Queue on the MCU Select the Entry Queue Service that will be used to play audio messages and prompts to participants waiting in the Entry Queue Leave this field blank to use the default Entry Queue Service if an Entry Queue Service was set as default Note The system is case sensitive Select this check box to define an Auto Cascade Entry Queue Defining an Auto Cascade Entry Queue is part of the setup process to enable automatic cascading of Ad Hoc conferences For details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Auto Cascading 5 15 Chapter 5 Meeting Rooms and Entry Queues 5 16 Table 5 4 Audio Only Entry Queue Properties Continued VTX 1000 Ad Hoc Target Conferences Select this check box to create a VTX 1000 enabled Entry Queue Participants connecting to VTX 1000 enabled Entry Queues are initially assigned wide band resources If the endpoint is not identified as VTX the wide band resources are subsequently released Select this option to enable Ad Hoc conferencing When selected an Ad Hoc conference to be created based on the Profile that was assigned to the Entry Queue For a detailed description of Ad Hoc options and definition see MGC Manager User s Guide Volume
157. e Participant Paste Participant As Ctrl P Next Questione Clear Q amp A Lock Go ce Mute Meet Me parties On Hold Voting Join to Gonference Fig Print Reservation Data Properties The participant s details are copied to the selected conference reservation under the same name 4 25 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences To paste the participant parameters while changing the name and other parameters click Paste Participant As The Participant Properties dialog box opens Change the participant s parameters and then click OK The modified participant is copied to the conference reservation For detailed information on defining participants see Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties on page 2 49 To copy the participant properties from a Database Reservation template or from the Participant Template You can copy a participant from a participant template to another participant template or to another conference 1 4 26 Open the Reservation in Database window or Participants in Database window as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Expand the Groups tree In the Reservations in Database window locate the Reservation template containing the participant that you wish to copy In the Participants in Database window locate the Participant template to copy Expand the Reservation template tree to list its participants I a ici Root
158. e The participant failed to enter the correct conference entry password and the Enable Operator assistance on Password Failure option is selected in this dialog box The On Hold for Operator Assistance option is selected in the IVR Welcome Message dialog box Disconnection If the Operator Assistance option is disabled select the Message appropriate audio file to be played when the participant fails to enter the correct conference password and is disconnected from the conference 6 30 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 6 8 IVR Service Properties Operator Assistance Continued Enable Operator Select this check box to allow the operator to assist the Assistance on participant once the participant has failed to enter the Password correct conference password in all the allowed attempts Failure When this check box is cleared the participant will be disconnected from the conference when failing to enter the correct conference password after hearing the disconnection message If no file was downloaded for a Message Type click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC unit s memory see page 6 10 Defining IVR Software Module Properties steps 5 8 19 Click Next The Roll Call dialog box opens Roll Call x Enable Roll Call Name Messagefle Roll Call Record RECORD ACA Roll Call Verify Record VERFIV ACA Roll Call Confirm Record CONFIRM ACA Roll Cal
159. e a voting session be the exclusive speaker MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 3 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns Continued aa fie Name bi Name cont Operator VIP participan VIP chairperson Questioner VIP Questioner Current questioner VIP Current questioner Disconnected participant Faulty connected participant Recording port Description The participant defined as the MGC Manager Operator The operator manages an On Going Conference connects and disconnects participants moves participants between conferences assists participants and more A participant or a chairperson defined as a VIP for preferential assistance The VIP status does not change the role of the participant A participant who is currently waiting in the Question and Answer queue The current questioner in a Question and Answer session When any type of defined participant is disconnected from the conference the respective icon is disabled An exclamation point next to the icon indicates that the participant has a problem and requires operator s assistance The cause of the problem is listed in the Connection column This port telephone is connected to an external device used for recording the conference 3 9 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences Table 3 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns Continued Displays additional information
160. e automatically assigned by the MCU The number In all conferences with undefined dial in participants the conference or Entry is taken from the dial in numbers defined in the ISDN T1 CAS Network Service Entry Queue Access Entry Queue is a call routing method in which all participants dial the same dial in number Participants are guided by voice prompts which are part of the Entry Queue Service The Entry Queue makes it possible to use a limited number of PSTN ISDN T1 CAS dial in numbers for all the conferences and to use toll free numbers for conferences which are charged to the meeting organizers Entry Queues that were defined for video conferencing can also be used for Audio Only conferences so there is no need to define separate Entry Queues for Audio Only conferences When the Entry Queue Access option is designated for a conference the participants connecting to that conference follow a two stage process 1 Participants connect to an Entry Queue where they are routed to their conference in one of two ways Automatically according to the Numeric ID or conference password depending on the MCU configuration or 2 10 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Wait for the Operator s assistance The Entry Queue Service is set to Attended mode on hold for Operator assistance 2 Participants join the conference in one of the following ways Directly without any additional operation from the partici
161. e chairperson password and therefore will not be able to connect as chairperson Select the appropriate audio files and options Table 6 5 IVR Service Properties Conference Chairperson Chairperson Identifier Select the message requesting the participants to Request enter the key that identifies them as the conference chairperson Request Chairperson Select the message that prompts the participant Password for the chairperson password Chairperson Password Select the message requesting the participant to Failure Message type that password again when the participant failed to enter the chairperson password correctly Chairperson Identifier Enter the key to be used for identifying the Key participant as a chairperson Possible keys are pound key or star MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 6 5 IVR Service Properties Conference Chairperson Continued Use Chairperson Select this option to enable the caller to join to the Password as conference as the chairperson using only the Conference Password chairperson password instead of two passwords the Conference Entry Password and the Chairperson Password Note When this option is enabled the chairperson password must be different from the conference entry password You can change the status of any participant to Chairperson during an On Going Conference by using the appropriate DTMF code and password Billing Code Select this option
162. e conference If you have enabled the conference specific message select the message the participant will hear when connecting to the conference The list includes all the audio files that were downloaded to the MGC unit s memory for this Message type The file can also be downloaded now On Hold for Select this option to automatically place participants Operator on hold when connecting to the conference and wait Assistance for the operator to move them to the destination conference While on hold participants hear background music if this feature is enabled Selecting this option results in the Attended conferencing For a detailed description see Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing 6 21 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services 6 22 6 ve In the Welcome Message dialog box click Next The Conference Chairperson dialog box opens x IV Enable Chairperson Messages Chairperson Identifier Request ENTRYOPT AC Add Message File Request Chairperson Password LEADPASS AC Add Message File Chairperson Password failure Message LEADRTRY AC Add Message File Chairperson Identifier Key I Billing Code ete TS Click Enable Conference Chairperson to enable a participant to connect to the conference as a Chairperson and play the appropriate messages while the participant waits in the IVR queue If this option is disabled the participant will not hear the prompt to enter th
163. e external database validation process Number of User Enter the number of times the user is able to respond Input Retries to each menu prompt before the participant is disconnected from the IVR system or waits for the Operator s assistance Timeout for User Enter the duration in seconds that the system waits for Input input from the participant before it is considered as an input error MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 6 11 Entry Queue Service Global Parameters Continued ce ae ae DTMF Delimiter The interaction between the caller and the system is done via touch tone signals DTMF codes Enter the key that will be used to indicate a DTMF command sent by the participant or the conference chairperson Possible keys are the pound key or star 4 Click Next The Welcome Message dialog box opens This dialog box contains a limited set of options that are identical to those defined in the IVR Welcome Message dialog box Welcome Message xi IV Enable Welcome Messages General Welcome Message WELCMPNS ACE Add Message File IV On hold for Operator Assistance lt Back Cancel Help If the Entry Queue Service is used in conjunction with an IVR Service and the conference is set to Entry Queue Access forcing participants to go through both queues when connecting to the conference will require the participant to hear the Welcome message twice once in the Entry Queue
164. e for an On Going Conference using the appropriate DTMF codes on the touch tone telephone While the conference is in a Secure mode the chairperson and conference participants can perform various operations using the appropriate DTMF codes such as voting or question and answer sessions These operations will not be displayed in the MGC Manager monitoring panes Once the chairperson secures or unsecures the conference an appropriate voice message is played The voice message is played only if it is configured in the IVR Message Service and if the appropriate audio file has been downloaded to the Audio card In a secure conference operator cannot perform the following actions e Join or attend the conference e View and control the participants of the conference e View and monitor the conference properties Implement Voting e Initiate an Invite session When the Roll Call option is enabled in the IVR Service assigned to the On Going Conference the chairperson can request the system to play the names of all connected conference participants at the beginning of the conference or at any time during the conference The IVR system then plays the recorded list of conference attendees one after the other in the order that they entered the conference The recordings are played to all the conference participants 4 73 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Roll Call Guidelines e The Roll Call Confirmation message
165. e participants can be located by using their URI addresses Indicates the signaling port used for participant connection For H 323 the default port is 1720 For SIP the default port is 5060 Enter the endpoint address in the format user name domain Note The SIP URI adheres to URI rules no spaces or special characters such as commas quotation marks inverted tags and so forth either in the user name or in the domain part MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 2 12 H 323 and SIP Participant Properties Identification Continued Address Type Select the format in which the SIP address is written SIP Only e SIP URI Uses the format of an E mail address typically containing a user name and a host name sip user host For example sip dan polycom com TEL URI Used when the endpoint does not specify the domain that should interpret a telephone number that has been input by the user Rather each domain through which the request passes would be given that opportunity As an example a user in an airport might log in and send requests through an outbound proxy in the airport not by the user s home domain Alias Name If you are using the endpoint s alias and not the IP H 323 Only address first select the type of alias and then enter the endpoint s alias as registered with the gatekeeper Enter the alias name using the naming conventions appropriate to the selected Alias type Alias Ty
166. e to participants is optional The Roll 4 Once the participants confirm the recording the system connects them to the conference and announces their names to the connected participants 5 During the conference the chairperson can request a roll call using the appropriate DTMF code from the endpoint s input device When the system plays back the participant names all conference participants get to hear it using the appropriate DTMF codes The chairperson can end the Roll Call playback at any time 6 5 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services 6 6 6 When a participant leaves or is disconnected from the conference participants remaining in the conference hear an audio message announcing the name of the participant who has left the conference Roll Call can be activated during different conference statuses Conference On Hold Participants who access a conference that was placed on hold must follow the usual connection process and record their names However when participants enter conferences on hold their names are not played to the conference The chairperson can request a roll call only when the conference is reinstated and the on hold state is revoked The list of played names will then include the participants who connected to the conference while it was on hold Admittance during a Roll Call When participants join or leave the conference during an on going Roll Call the corresponding announcement is played immediat
167. ect either the Meet Me Per Conf option or the Entry Queue Access option 2 18 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 2 1 Conference Properties General Continued User Defined Enter general information for the conference such as the 1 3 company name contact person s name email or telephone number or any other required information Note e User Defined fields are displayed only if the Show User Defined Fields in Conference Parameters option is selected in the Database Manager gt Defaults gt User Defined Defaults The titles of the User Defined fields can be modified in the Database Manager gt Defaults gt User Defined Defaults and loaded to the MGC Manager application For a detailed description on how to load the user defined default titles see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 3 Conference Type Select the type of conference e Standard Select this option to define a conference that will be deleted from the MCU once it is terminated and whose resources are allocated to its participants at the end of the definition process Meeting Room Select this option to define a conference that remains permanently on the MCU It exists inactive without resource allocated to it and can be activated repeatedly when the first participant connects to it It is terminated when the last participant exits Operator Select this option to define an Operator Conference An Operator C
168. ecting this option also enables the automatic extension of conference duration for this conference For more details see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 5 MCU Utilities Select this option to play the exit tone to all the connected participants when a participant disconnects from the conference The tone is embedded in the MGC unit If the Roll Call option is enabled for the conference the Exit Tone is replaced by a playback of the recorded participant s name and the voice message has left the conference Indicate how many of the loudest voices speaking at the same time will be heard The value 3 indicates that the three loudest participants speaking at the same time will be heard Maximum number of participants that can be mixed is 5 2 27 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants Participants 2 28 Participants can be added to the On Going Conference either by selecting the participant templates from the Participant database or by defining them When defining a participant during the definition of an On Going Conference or after it has started the participants default parameters are set according to the conference media and type For example when defining the participant during an On Going Audio Only conference only Audio participants can be defined Dial in participants can be defined or undefined Undefined dial in participants can connect to an Entry Qu
169. ed For private help Dec 10 2003 15 18 55 Audio 1 ACCORD by you 7 35 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing Performing Operations using the Right Click Menu Moving a Participant to the Operator Conference To move a participant to the Operator conference from the On Going Conferences list 1 In the Browser Status or Monitor panes display the list of participants in the On Going Conference 2 Right click the icon of the participant to be moved to the Operator conference and then click Attend Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Move Participant b Copy Participant Ctrl C Cut Ctrl x Delete Del Exclusive Speaker Q amp A Operations Hold To Home Conf F3 Mute Audio Ctrl M Block Audio Turn OFf AGC Properties The participant is moved to the Operator conference while his her icon remains in the conference list and in the Participants Queue list An exclamation point appears next to the Participant icon in the Name column of all panes and in the conference tree fey In addition the Attended icon te is displayed in the Status column of the Participants List in the Monitor and Status panes 7 36 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition To move a participant to the Operator conference from the Participants Queue tree or Participants Queue window 1 Display the list of participants in the Participants Queue in the Browser or Status pane or in the Participants Queue window Right clic
170. ed participants S button on the Participants Dragging and Dropping the Participant icon Click the To Home Conf Queue toolbar Expand the On Going Conferences list in the Browser pane to display the Home Conference icon Drag the icons of the participants to the Browser pane and drop them on the Home Conference icon The selected participants are immediately connected to the conference 7 45 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing 7 46 A Appendix A Glossary This appendix lists the terms and abbreviations that relate to the MGC functionalities and technologies and are commonly used in the MGC Manager documentation rem Explanation Term AMI Alternate Mark Inversion A T1 line coding format inverting alternate ones Asynchronous A transmission method used by dial up modems Data is transmitted using a start bit at the beginning of a character and a stop bit at the end The time interval between characters may be of varying lengths ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode High speed up to 155 Mbps high bandwidth network that integrates voice video and data ATM provides connectivity to LANs WANs private networks and sub networks ATM supports applications requiring high transmission speeds large transmission capacities and bandwidth on demand Audio Bridge Used to mix multiple audio inputs and to output composite audio to each of the endpoints connected to a conference Bipolar 8 Zero Substituti
171. ed state and its status and indicators in the Monitor and Status panes are updated accordingly New dial in participants can now connect to the On Going Conference 4 35 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Managing Question and Answer Sessions 4 36 The Question and Answer Q amp A session provides a method of organizing the participants questions or comments during a lecture or a large conference During a typical large conference or lecture all participants excluding the lecturer or the main speaker are muted by the system A participant who wants to ask a question or comment on the subject being discussed presses the appropriate code on the DTMF input device the default code is 22 to enter the Q amp A queue Participants queue in the order in which they have requested to ask a question You can also place participants in the Q amp A queue from the MGC Manager application using the Q amp A toolbar Once the participant is in the Q amp A queue you can select them to ask the question or let the next participant in line ask the question If the participant is muted by the MCU for example in the Exclusive Speaker mode you have to unmute the participant before you let him or her ask the question You can stop the questioner any time during the question or you can end the current Q amp A session by selecting the appropriate function in the MGC Manager application The chairperson can end the Q amp A sessi
172. ee press star 4 To admit an invitee to the conference and invite another participant press star 1 To disconnect the invitee and invite another participant press star 2 To admit an invitee to the conference and return to the conference press star 3 To disconnect the invitee and return to the conference press star 4 General Voting The available touch tone keypad VOTEHLP ACA Help menu actions are as follows To exit this menu press any key To vote press star r 8 1 To end the voting session and get the results press pound 8 1 To start a new voting session press star 8 2 To cancel the voting session press pound 8 2 6 60 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 6 16 Default IVR Messages Continued Message Type Roll Call User name recording request Roll Call Playing the recorded name for the user to get confirmation Roll Call Name recording confirmation Roll Call Participant s entry prompt Roll Call Participant s exit prompt Roll Call Introduction to the participant s list prompt Roll Call End of Roll Call list SilencelT Adjust SilencelT sensitivity and unmute SilencelT Disable SilencelT and unmute Silencel T SilencelT menu After the tone please state your name The name you have recorded is here the system will play the name Press one to record your
173. eeees 4 44 Viewing and Saving Voting Results oo eee 4 48 Placing a Conference On Hold wee eeeeceeseeseeeeeseeeeeeeeees 4 50 Modifying Conference General Parameters eee 4 53 Changing the Conference Duration 00 oceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 4 54 Ending a Conference before its Scheduled Termination Time 4 55 Rescheduling Conference Reservations cee eee eeeeeees 4 56 Deleting Recurring Reservations 00 0 cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 4 57 Printing Conference Data oo ececeseceeeeeeesetseeeeeeeeseeeeeee 4 59 Managing Conferences Using DTMF Codes eee eeeeeeeeeeees 4 63 DMF Guideline ies jssedisscscssvecvedessvsoscdviossedsvsseseos tovecdedans vas vee 4 63 Using DTMF Codes in Cascading Conferences ee 4 69 Modifying Conference and Chairperson Passwords 4 69 Request DTMF Help Menu 000 eee ceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 4 71 Dialing Out to Invite Participants Invite Session 0 0 0 4 7 Chairperson Initiated Dial out 20 0 0 ec eeeeseesceneceteeeneeeaeeneeeneee 4 72 Managing Secure Mode Conferences cseesesreeseeereneeeeees 4 73 ROW Call vet sctesescetectsen scianuited neeicesieciandites o SEE AEE NO oaea 4 73 Meeting Rooms and Entry Queues assassnnnnnnnne 5 1 Meeting ROOMS essssezerecsieserexeeestecaina ocassctpodealasessnachaciesonscaunsvensarees 5 1 Bnthy Queues a na E O OE 5 2 Defining a New Audio Only Meeting Room 00 eee 5 4 Manually Assigning Phone Numbers to the
174. efault voice message is participant s name has been automatically muted due to a noisy line Note This option is available only if the Roll Call option on the Roll Calltab is enabled in the same IVR Message Service If no file was downloaded for a Message Type click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC units memory see Defining IVR Software Module Properties on page 6 10 steps 5 8 26 Click Next The DTMF Codes dialog box opens This dialog box lists the default DTMF codes for the various functions that can be performed during the audio conference by all participants or by the chairperson A combination of digits activates a function for example 70 activates the Lock Conference feature For each function you can modify the DTMF code and the permission 6 35 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services 6 36 27 28 29 For the list of all actions and their respective default DTMF codes see Managing Conferences Using DTMF Codes on page 4 63 To print the DTMF codes data see Printing IVR DTMF Codes on page 6 52 Optional In the Name field click the function whose code you wish to modify The appropriate DTMF code appears in the box below the list DTMF codes x Name TMF Code Permissions 0 Request Private Assistance Everyone Request Assistance for Conference oo Chairperson Mute My Line a Everyone Unmute My Line 6 Everyone Lock Con
175. efined fields for additional conference and participant information e Chairperson features and control e Presentation operator guidance e Conference locking e Access to external recording devices e Use of Roll Call and conference greetings e Mute on access Mute all incoming parties e Self Mute e SilenceIT automatic muting of noisy lines e Automatic termination of conference e Conference On Hold with background music e E mail notification with Web scheduling only e Access to a Reservations database Security features e Conference specific and Chairperson specific entry password e Conference locking mechanism e Roll Call for joining participants identification e Data encryption at MCU conference and participant level Conference control options e Touch tone DTMF codes MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition MGC Manager Windows interface WebCommander Web Browser Polycom ReadiManager application On Going Conference management and monitoring Active or exclusive speaker indication DTMF detection for any participant Connect and disconnect individual participants Add participants during an On Going Conference Dial out to a participant during an On Going Conference Invite Identify connected participants Mute and unmute participants Control individual broadcasting and listening audio volume Manually and automatically extend the conference duration Lock and unlock the conference to dial
176. ely thereby interrupting the on going Roll Call When the Roll Call is resumed the name of the participant who left the conference is skipped not played No Other Participants Indication When the chairperson asks for a Roll Call and there are no other participants in the conference at that time only the chairperson s name will be played Enabling Roll Call Roll Call must be enabled or disabled at the conference level by assigning a Roll Call enabled IVR Service and by enabling it in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box However if the Roll Call option is not enabled in the IVR Message Service it cannot be activated for the conference For more details on enabling Roll Call during a conference and a list of Roll Call DTMF options see Chapter 4 Roll Call on page 4 73 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Using SilencelT The SilenceIT feature is part of the IVR Service used to automatically mute audio participants who placed their phone lines on hold during an On Going Conference causing all other conference participants to hear the background music When the audio participant is muted an IVR message may be played to the conference informing the other participants that one of the participants was muted due to a noisy line When muted participants return to the conference they hear a message informing them that their line was detected as noisy and muted At this point the participant can press l
177. em cfg flag that enables the SilenceIT option for the MCU For a detailed description see Fine Tuning the SilenceIT Algorithm on page 6 63 Enable the SilenceIT option in the IVR Message Service and select the voice messages for this feature For a detailed description see Defining a New IVR Message Service on page 6 17 Optional Modify the DTMF codes assigned to the SilenceIT options in the IVR Message Service For a detailed description see Defining a New IVR Message Service on page 6 17 Select the SilenceIT enabled IVR Message Service in the Conference Properties Settings tab Select the SilenceIT option in the Conference Properties Settings tab For a description of new conference definition refer to Chapter 2 If you select an IVR service that is not SilencelT enabled while enabling the SilencelT option the conference will be rejected at the end of the definition process when it is saved on the MCU MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition IVR Requirements Appropriate hardware and audio files are required for the IVR system Hardware The following hardware is required to set up and manage IVR conferences e Audio card The Audio card stores the audio messages that are part of the IVR Service These messages are played while the participants wait in an IVR enabled Entry Queue Participants Queue or conference e Music I O card optional An I O card attached to the rear of the Audio module
178. en connecting to the conference the participant hears the Welcome message twice once in the Entry Queue and again in the IVR queue To avoid hearing the welcome message twice create an empty welcome message that is two seconds long for the IVR Service When the participant enters the conference two seconds of silence will play before the Entry Queue s welcome message e If no file was downloaded for a Message type click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC unit s memory For more details see page 6 10 Defining IVR Software Module Properties steps 5 8 e When the IVR Service is used in conjunction with an Entry Queue Service 6 20 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition If you have enabled the Welcome Message option select the following options and files Table 6 4 IVR Service Properties Welcome Message General Welcome None to skip the General Welcome message Message for example if the participant already heard the message in the Entry Queue Select the Message to be played when the participant first connects to the conferencing service and enters the conference IVR queue The list includes all the audio files that were downloaded to the MGC unit s memory for this Message type The file can also be downloaded now Conference Select this option to enable a conference specific Welcome Message message When cleared no message is played when the participant enters th
179. ence in the Remarks section All remarks are displayed in the Remarks History box in the ascending order latest entry at top of the list Remarks can also be added from the Web via the WebCommander application The entries are added to the CDR file for retrieval during the billing stage To enter and save a remark during an On Going Conference 1 Open the On Going Conference Properties dialog box and if required click the General tab The On Going Conference Properties General dialog box opens Polycom Properties Product Management xj General Scheduler Settings Participants Ongoing State Recording Polycom Conf Entry Password 002400 Duration 3 00 Web Chairperson Password 055382 Billing Numeric ID 1884 User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 r Supported Network OP IP ISDN ATM MPI Product Management v remark 2 Update Remark Remarks History 20 12 2004 12 35 29 remark 1 Cancel Apply Help 2 Inthe Remarks box enter text up to 300 characters Click Update Remark 4 31 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences To add a remark longer than 300 characters split the text into several remarks using the Update Remarks button to save the current remark and start a new remark To add multiple remarks repeat steps 2 and 3 Click OK The dialog box closes and the new remark is written to the C
180. ence or Meeting Room by dialing the H 323 Network Service Prefix and the Numeric ID of the conference 11 To manually add an H 323 Network Service Prefix to the conference in the H 323 Prefix Service pane click the plus icon The H323 Service dialog box opens H323 Service x H 323 Network Service Name H 323 Service Prefix Cancel a Define the following parameters Table 5 3 H 323 Network Service Parameters H 323 Network Enter the name of the IP Network Service that Service Name contains the prefix to be used by participants connecting to the conference H 323 Service Enter the Network Service prefix as defined in the P Prefix Network Service Properties H 323 dialog box If required repeat these steps to define additional prefixes 5 10 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition b Click OK Completing the Meeting Room Definition 12 If required define the recording parameters for the Meeting Room For more details see Recording on page 2 35 13 Click OK to complete the Meeting Room definition The new Meeting Room is added to the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories list Once the Meeting Room is activated it becomes an On Going Conference and it is listed under the On Going Conferences list Room is in use by another reserved conference or if the MCU has run out of LS The Meeting Room will fail to start if the dial in number allocated to the Meeting resources
181. ences Using DTMF Codes Participants and chairpersons can manage their On Going Conferences from their endpoints using the touch tone signals DTMF codes DTMF Guidelines e Participants can perform various operations using DTMF codes only if an IVR Service is assigned to the conference e Permissions for DTMF actions to be performed by all conference participants or by chairperson only are configured in the IVR Service DTMF Codes assigned to the conference Both the DTMF codes and the user permissions can be modified for individual IVR Services Table 4 4 lists the DTMF driven functions their corresponding default input codes and user permissions Table 4 4 DTMF Operations Performed During Conference DTMF Function and Message Sage Permission Request private assistance 0 Everyone To request private assistance press star zero Request assistance for conference 00 Chairperson To request operator s assistance for the conference press zero zero Mute my line Everyone To mute your line press star six Un mute my line Everyone To un mute your line press pound six Lock conference Chairperson To lock the conference to dial in participants press star seven zero Unlock conference Chairperson To unlock the conference press pound seven zero 4 63 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 4 64 Table 4 4 DTMF Operations Performed During Conference Continued DTMF Fun
182. endix A Glossary Abbreviation Term Explanation Network Service A collection of spans from a fixed service provider Network services can be any of the following types e Private Network e Public Utility including Long distance service Local service PTT PBX local switchboard leased line Null modem A serial cable designed to eliminate the need for cable communication equipment when two digital devices are directly connected to each other Port One of 23 channels in a T1 PRI one of 24 channels in a T1 leased line or one of 30 channels in an E1 PRI POTS Plain Old Telephone System The conventional analog telephone line Priority Rate Interface An ISDN interface designed for high volume data communication Consists of 23 B channels of 64 Kbps each and one D channel of 64 Kbps In Europe the PRI line provides 30 B channels one D channel Quarter CIF A video format with image size of 176x144 pixels that transmits 9 115 Mbps at 30 frames per second a quarter of the capacity of CIF See also CIF RS 232 A standard for serial interface connection Session Initiation Protocol An application layer protocol designed to work over IP networks A SIP service defines the properties and the IP addresses of the SIP network components An ISDN line or leased line A span may be of either T1 United States or E1 Europe type Also called a circuit Switched 56 line A line using protocols pre dating the ISDN protocols a
183. er 3 2 69 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants Listing Participants You can view the updated list of participants in the On Going Conference list in the Browser Status and Monitor panes Ep On Going Conferences 1 Audio 1 is i io Disconnected participant i Lynne Recording Recording port re Michelle 8 Nadine audio Connected participant Tf Dial Out Manually was selected in the Conference Properties dialog box participants remain disconnected Stand By state until the operator initiates the connection from the MCU to the participant Until all participants connect to conference the conference shows the Not Full status e Tf Dial out Manually was not selected for the conference the system automatically dials out to all listed participants and connects them to the conference e Defined dial in participants status is Waiting for dial in until they connect to the conference 2 70 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences You can monitor On Going Conferences and perform various operations while conferences are running Three levels of monitoring are available with the MGC Manager e General Monitoring You can monitor the general status of all On Going Conferences and their participants in the MGC Manager main window e Conference Level Monitoring You can view additional information regarding a specific conferen
184. erences oo eee cece cee eeeeseeeeeeeeesaeeneeeees 2 40 Scheduling a New Reservation eee eeeeseeseceeeseeseeeeeeetseeeeeees 2 41 Defining Recurrent Reservations 0 00 cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 2 44 TASting RESCLVallONS ssecesedessextcentessedieceasdeneceadesttacerieanianeencanenyy 2 47 End of Conference Reminder w0 ce ccee eee cee ceeceseeseeeeeseeseeeeeeeaes 2 48 Defining Participant Properties 00 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaes 2 49 ISDN PSTN T1 CAS Participant Definition 0 0 0 2 51 IP H 323 and SIP Participant Definition 0 0 0 2 59 Dialing in from an H 323 Endpoint 00 eee eect eeeeeeeees 2 67 Simple Dial in Using the IP Card Address 2 67 Simple Dial in Using the IP Card Alias oe 2 67 H 323 Advanced Dial in oi eee eeeeeseeseeseeeseseeeeeeeees 2 68 Listing Participants ss scssesvecdecesedesseavessecaness esaueseuecauceas canecaescevianvcauesiuedts 2 70 Monitoring On Going Conferences 00 20000 3 1 General Monitoring oo ee cece eeeeeeeceeeeseeaeceeeessecseeeeeeecseseeseaeegs 3 2 Listing On Going Conferences in the Status Pane 3 3 General Conference and Participant Monitoring ee 3 5 Monitoring the Conference and Participant Status 3 5 Additional Participant Statuses oo eee eeeeseeseeeeeeeees 3 15 Participant s Audio Status ec eee eeeeseeecseeeeeeeeeeeees 3 16 Monitor Falter it seissccceccecsssusavescosclvecevsousouvascuccdesenecuasuvacedeseeeaveedts 3 17
185. erencing system offers a comprehensive range of capabilities for audio conferencing Scheduling methods Conferences can be started immediately or scheduled in advance on the Polycom MCU by means of the following applications e Windows based MGC Manager e Browser based WebCommander e Microsoft Outlook using the MGC Personal Scheduler add on e Polycom ReadiManager application Conference scheduling options e Ad Hoc conferencing e On demand conferencing On Going e Meet Me reservationless conferences Meeting Rooms e Scheduled conferences Reservations e Recurrent conferences Conference modes e Attended Operator Assisted conference reserved and reservationless e Unattended conference reserved and reservationless Conference access e VoIP H 323 and SIP T1 CAS and ISDN participants in a single conference 1 3 Chapter 1 VoicePlus Overview e Dial in Toll free dial in and caller paid dial in e Automated blast dial out e Operator initiated dial out e Participant dial out inviting new participants e Combination of dial in and dial out e One dial in number for all conferences Entry Queue Conference features and options e Automatic password and identification number generation at time of conference booking e Two allocated passwords conference and chairperson password e Single telephone number can be associated with all conferences e Reservation of resources at the conference setup stage e User d
186. eria by Connection Type Connection Type Conflict Criteria Dial out ISDN Name or phone number s PSTN T1 CAS Dial out IP Name and IP address or Alias IP address and Alias when both provided Dial in Name or phone number 2 37 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants 2 38 If a conflict is detected in the reservation or in an On Going Conference the Participants Scheduling Conflicts window opens listing the found data Participants scheduling conflicts x The following parties are booked in the system Requested Participants Phone Ip Aias Conn Type Cont Name Cont Type Stat Time David 9251000 Diahout Engineering Res 02 04 2008 18 00 David 9251000 Dial out Sales 1 Cont 02 04 2003 17 51 Deborah Diakin Engineering Res 02 04 2003 18 00 Deborah 9251010 Dial out Sales 1 Cort 02 04 2003 17 51 A Edward 172 22 138 100 Dial out Engineering Res 02 04 2003 18 00 Edward 172 22 138 100 Dialin Sales 1 Cont 02 04 2003 17 51 zi Include selected participants and schedule Back to reservation Cancel scheduling The following information is displayed Table 2 6 Participants Scheduling Conflicts Table Requested Lists the names of conflicting participants requested to join Participants the conference currently being created Reserved Lists the names of participants already scheduled in Participants previously created conferences whose data match those of the
187. ervices Span dialog box If left blank when the conference starts the MCU automatically assigns a dial in number from the list of numbers defined in the ISDN Network Service Note During an On Going Conference the MCU numbers are listed in the Network Phone IP column of the main window Status pane The format number of digits depends on how the dial in numbers are forwarded from the PBX switch to the MCU and whether the PBX truncates part of the number 2 52 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 2 10 ISDN PSTN T1 CAS Properties and Identification Dialog Box Extension Used with multi step extension dialing and Identifier String participants with PBX or IVR phone extensions This field is used to enter the required data for the dialing The string listed in the Name field consists of the following format 0 9 Free text Ext Extension p extension number p extension number p For example 9Sales Ext p345p222p Each section of the string is explained below e 0 9 Any digit between 0 and 9 the digit being any number that identifies the participant during a DTMF dial out sequence For example when a chairperson activates a dial out session by pressing 259 25 is the DTMF command code that activates the dial out session and 9 is the number that identifies a particular participant to be used in the session Free text Optional text field and may be omitted Continued Note In c
188. ervices refer to see Chapter 6 Setting IVR Message Services on page 6 17 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Requirements for an Attended Conference A conference can be defined set as attended or unattended by setting the IVR Service to attended mode In such a conference the connection to the conference is managed by the operator as well as the operations performed during the conference such as managing the Question and Answer session voting muting and unmuting participants and more An Operator conference is required to manage the connection to attended conferences An Operator conference can have up to two participants only the operator and a participant The operator can move a participant from the Entry Queue conference IVR Queue Participants Queue or On Going Conference to a private one on one conversation in the Operator conference by selecting or clearing the On hold for Operator Assistance option in the Entry Queues Service assigned to the entry queue If the conference is accessed from the Entry Queue the connection to the conference is set to attended mode To run attended conferences the following entries must be set Table 7 1 Attended Conference Entities An ongoing An Operator conference is a side conference that enables Operator the operator to assist participants without disturbing the On conference Going Conferences and without being heard by other conference participants It ca
189. es The Entry Queue Properties dialog box opens xl Entry Queue Settings Name Entry Queue Service ad Numeric ID I Cascade IF vTXx 1000 r Target Conference Settings I AdHoc Pofle z Target Conferences V Audio Only F IP Only I Encryption Audio Alg Dial in Number 1 Dial in Number 2 Cancel 3 Define the following parameters Table 5 4 Audio Only Entry Queue Properties Enter the name of the Entry Queue using up to 80 characters Note An error message is displayed when saving the Entry Queue if the name is used in any other conference Meeting Room or Entry Queue on the same MCU MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 5 4 Audio Only Entry Queue Properties Continued Numeric ID Entry Queue Service A Numeric ID NID is a unique number that identifies the Entry Queue to the system This number is used by H 323 endpoints to connect to the Entry Queue Numeric IDs are assigned manually or automatically e To manually assign the Numeric ID enter a number containing the number of digits defined in the system cfg file If the same Numeric ID is already in use in another Entry Queue or conference an error message is displayed when the Entry Queue is saved on the MCU To automatically assign the Numeric ID complete the Entry Queue definition The MCU assigns a unique Numeric ID automatically when the new Entry Queue is saved on th
190. es listed in Table 6 17 on page 6 64 Based on the range of these values the user locates the corresponding parameter which is used to configure a system cfg flag To enable the SilenceIT algorithm and fine tune its operation 1 Create an ongoing conference and connect an endpoint using a noisy line In the Cards section locate the audio card used to handle the participant connection to the conference and write down the slot and unit numbers Using the participant s endpoint place the call on hold When the participant places the call on hold music is heard Right click the MCU icon and then click IP Terminal The Donkey COM window opens In the cmd gt field enter the following command Level g lt slot gt and then press lt Enter gt In the command line enter AM lt slot gt lt unit gt CALCSTRMSTAT and press lt Enter gt The message Started gathering signal statistics appears indicating that the data gathering process has started Wait 15 seconds for the data gathering process to complete 6 63 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services 6 64 8 In the command line enter AM lt slot gt lt unit gt GETCSTRMSTAT and press lt Enter gt ag Donkey COM Product Manager o x K File Options Window Help la x st lin Sending Level g lt 6 gt Remote Command Level g lt 6 gt Sending gt AM lt 6 gt lt 3 gt CALCSTRMSTAT Remote Comm
191. ess their preference on a set of choices using the touch tone keypad during an On Going Conference The system uses digits to correlate participant votes to the items for which they are voting A voting session can include up to 10 choices for one subject Each choice is assigned a digit between 0 to 9 and a descriptive title For example in an employees meeting the employees have to vote for one of the benefit plans suggested by the management Each plan is assigned a digit for example if there are 5 plans the choices may be 0 to 4 and a short description A voting session consists of three main stages D Preparation stage Before the voting session begins the operator or the chairperson using the WebCommander application creates the list of choices and their descriptions The operator or the chairperson then informs the conference participants of the choices available for selection and the digit assigned to each option Voting stage When voting each participant enters the digit that represents the participant s choice using the DTMF input device As each vote is counted the information is presented on line in the Voting window Results stage When the voting is completed the final results are viewed The operator or the chairperson can save the voting results to a file or start a new vote Voting sessions are available in IVR enabled conferences that are run on Audio cards and require the use of a DTMF input device
192. etailed information on defining participants see Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties on page 2 49 Click OK The new participant is added to the conference and is displayed in all the panes of the main window From the Conference toolbar a b Expand the On Going Conferences list click the icon of the conference to which to add the participant and then click the New Participant button on the Conference toolbar The Participant Properties dialog box opens Repeat the steps b and c of the previous procedure From the Conference Properties dialog box 4 23 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences a Expand the On Going Conferences list right click the icon of the conference to which to add the participant and then click Properties The Conference Properties dialog box opens b Click the Participants tab The Conference Properties Participants dialog box opens Q4Sales Properties Product Management 4 xj General Scheduler Settings Participants Ongoing State Recording Pre Defined Participants Conference Participants ae Search F Allow Undefined Partie Min Participants fp Max Participants Auto m Pre Defined Participants File C Documents and Settings wandas My Documents MGC Manager L I Diat Gut Manually Browse From database From directory OK Cancel Apply Help c Click the New button The Participan
193. etwork Service to be used by participants to connect to the conference exactly as it is defined in the Network Services list the system is case sensitive Dial in Number Enter the first dial in number to be assigned to the 1 conference This number must be defined in the dial in numbers range defined for the selected ISDN Network Service or the T1 CAS Network Service For more details regarding the dial in numbers range see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 3 Note When connecting ISDN lines via a private PBX to the MCU the PBX may truncate the dialed numbers In that case the dial in numbers defined in the ISDN Network Service may include only part of the dialed string The operator must add the truncated digits to the dial in number conveyed to the participant Dial in Number Enter the second dial in number to be assigned to the 2 conference This number is optional 5 9 Chapter 5 Meeting Rooms and Entry Queues b Click OK The dial in range is added to the ISDN Service table Repeat the above steps to define additional dial in numbers Use the same procedures when manually adding and removing T1 CS dial in numbers Manually Assigning the H 323 Service Prefix to the Conference To assign the H 323 Service Prefix to the conference The H 323 Network Service Prefix is part of the dialing string entered by H 323 dial in participants H 323 participants can dial in to a conference defined as Meet Me per Confer
194. eue Access conference a Meeting Room or a Meet Me Per Conference without prior scheduling as long as they know the conference dial in number the conference password or numeric ID depending on the MCU configuration and the conference start date and time This mode is usually used in unattended conferences New Participants can be defined in one of the following methods From the Conference Properties dialog box when scheduling the conference or during the On Going Conference e From the conference right click menu or the Add Participant icon during On Going Conference Participant template that is stored in the Participant Database or in the User Template file can be used to add participants to conferences without defining their parameters The parameters are taken from the template The definitions of the Participant Template in the User Template or in the Participants Database are described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition To add participants to a conference Te Click the Participants tab to add participants to the conference The Properties Participants dialog box opens xl General Settings Participants Recording Pre Defined Participants Conference Participants ae Search F Allow Undefined Parties Min Participants E Max Participants Auto Pre Defined Participants File C Documents and Settings wandas My Documents PartyT emplatesF
195. ference 70 Chairperson Unlock Conference 70 Chairperson Secure Conference 71 Chairperson Unsecure Conference 71 Chairperson Increase My Broadcasting Volume 3 Everyone x Request Private fo Everyone X Chai In the DTMF Code left field enter the new code In the Permission right field select whether this function may be used by all conference participants or only the chairperson Click Finish to complete the IVR Service definition The new IVR Message Service is added to the IVR Services list MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Listing IVR Message Services You can list the currently defined IVR Services in the Browser pane of the MGC Manager main window To list the IVR Message Services 1 Expand the MCU tree and then expand the MCU Configuration tree to view its options 2 Expand the IVR Msg Services tree to list the IVR Message Services The list of currently defined IVR Message Services and Entry Queue Services is displayed Product Management Normal A gag MCU Configuration H E Cards oe Connections H A IVR Msg Services BD Attended B Attended Service SBA click and view as EQ Demo golly Sg EQ OP Asstd To view or modify the properties of a specific IVR Message Service double click the icon of the service in the list 6 37 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services Setting an IVR Message Service as Default 6 38 The first IVR Service that was defined in
196. ference An attended conference is an Operator Assisted conference It is a service designed usually for large conferences that require the personal touch In the attended conference the connection to the conference is controlled by the operator and in many instances the operator also takes part in the On Going Conference In many attended conferences the name and the telephone numbers of each dial out participant are given to the operator at the time the reservation is made This information is used to define the participants prior to the conference start in the MGC Manager or the WebCommander applications Using the enhanced tools for attended participants the operator or coordinator organizes the conference call makes sure all invited participants are on hand calls the participants then sees to it that the conference proceeds according to plan If the Entry Queue Service assigned to the Entry Queue used for conference access is set to Attended mode On Hold for Operator Assistance when the participants connect to the Entry Queue they are automatically moved to the Participants Queue where they wait for the operator to connect them to the conference In the same way an IVR Service can be configured to Attended mode Then all participants connecting to the conference are automatically moved to the Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants Participants Queue where they wait for the operator to co
197. for a connected participant Table 3 16 VoIP Participant Properties H245 Lists the resources used by the connected endpoint participant Remote Lists the protocols used by the connected endpoint Communication participant Mode Local Lists the protocols used by the MCU Communication Mode In this tab you cannot modify information 6 Click the Resource Details tab to view the MCU resources allocated to the participant The Participant Properties Resource Details dialog box opens Audio party Properties 5 Identification Advanced Connection Infot Connection Info2 H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Resource Details Boadid Unitid Allocated MUX None None NO AUDIO CODEC 15 2 YES AUDIO BRIDGE None None NO VIDEO None None NO TI20BRIDGE None None NO TIZOCODEC None None NO IP 3 2 YES aje j m Net Resource Details Channel Board Id Unit Id Port Id Allocated The displayed information is the same as for ISDN participant see Table 3 11 ISDN Participant Properties Resource Details page 3 34 3 44 7 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition If the participant has been disconnected click the Disconnection Cause tab to view the reasons for the participant s inability to connect to the conference The H 323 Participant Properties Disconnection Cause tab opens Alan Properties Identification Advanced Connection Infot Connection Info2 H24
198. formation about recording the audio channel of a conference see the MGC Manager User Guide Vol II Chapter 9 Recording Completing the Conference Definition 2 36 1 To complete the conference definition procedure click OK from any of the Conference Properties tabs The Properties dialog box closes If all the properties are configured correctly and if there are sufficient MCU resources to run the conference the new conference is added to the On Going Conferences list in the Browser pane of the main window and starts immediately You can click the conference icon to view the status data in the Status and Monitor pane of the MGC Manager main window MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Resolving Scheduling Conflicts Upon completion of scheduling a Reservation or an On Going Conference the system checks for scheduling conflicts for individual participants A scheduling conflict for a participant results when two or more conferences are set up to occur at the same time or at overlapping times and contain one of the following parameters e Participants with the same name e Participants with the same ISDN or T1 CAS phone numbers e Participants with the same IP address or Alias Depending on the connection type that was defined for the participant MGC Manager looks for specific conflict criteria to determine if the participant is double booked Table 2 5 lists these criteria Table 2 5 Scheduling Conflict Crit
199. from the ISDN Network Service For more details see Manually Assigning Phone Numbers to the Conference on page 5 8 H 323 Service Displays the IP H 323 Network Service Name and the H 323 Service Prefix assigned to the Meeting Room Click the plus p button to add dial in numbers to the IP H 323 Network Service and the minus a button to remove dial in numbers from the IP H 323 Network Service For more details see Manually Assigning the H 323 Service Prefix to the Conference on page 5 10 5 7 Chapter 5 Meeting Rooms and Entry Queues 5 8 To define Meet Me ISDN T1 CAS Services The conference dial in phone number can be assigned by the operator or automatically by the system This number is then given to all participants who will be connecting to that conference A single dial in number that is allocated by the system when the Meeting Room is saved on the MCU is derived from the dial in numbers defined in the ISDN or T1 CAS Network Service The phone number assigned by the system can be viewed in the Status pane of the MGC Manager window or when checking the Meeting Room properties The list of dial in numbers assigned to the Meeting Room is displayed in the Meet Me Services table The first column displays the ISDN Network Service name The Phone 1 and Phone 2 columns display the first and second phone numbers assigned to the conference You can add T1 CAS dial in numbers in the same way as ISDN numbe
200. g Conference Continued DTMF Function and Message Enable Roll Call Chairperson To enable a Roll Call press star three two Disable Roll Call Chairperson To disable a Roll Call press pound three two Roll Call review names Chairperson To initiate the roll call and playback of the participant names press star three three Roll Call stop review names Chairperson To end playback of participant names press pound three three Start Dial Out 25 Chairperson To start the dial out press star two five Conference Termination 87 Chairperson To end the conference press star eight seven Start Click amp View Everyone To start the Click amp View application press star star Change to Chairperson Everyone To change the status of a participant to Chairperson press star seven eight Increase my Broadcast volume Everyone To increase your volume press star nine Decrease my Broadcast volume Everyone To decrease your volume press pound nine Increase my listening volume Everyone To increase your volume press star seven six Decrease my listening volume Everyone To decrease your volume press pound seven six 4 66 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 4 4 DTMF Operations Performed During Conference Continued DTMF Function and Message Override Mute All But Me Everyone To enable participants to unmute their endpoints while the Exclusive Speaker Mute mode
201. h as audio cards cannot handle the requested conference because it exceeds its limitations Bad A fault occurred in one of the Resources cards Participant Indicators Connected The participant is successfully connected to the conference ot Disconnected The defined participant is disconnected from the conference This status may occur when the participant is disconnected from the On Going Conference either by the operator or from the participant side Connecting Displayed during the connection process of a participant to the conference Stand By In a conference that was set to Dial out Manually the dial out participant is waiting for the MCU call Waiting for The system is waiting for the Dial in defined dial in participant to dial into the conference 3 11 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences Table 3 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns Continued Column en Connection p Partial The connection process is not yet cont connection complete Faulty The participant is connected but Connection problems occurred in the connection such as synchronization loss Noisy Line The line of this participant was ua detected by the system as noisy Note This indicator is used only when the automatic noisy line detection option was enabled in the system cfg Network The type of supported network that the conference is using ISDN T1 CAS H 323 or SIP Participant Display
202. hairperson can only cancel the Exclusive Speaker mode You can manually add special DTMF codes to enable participants to override the Exclusive Speaker Mute mode For more details see Table 4 4 on page 4 63 When the Exclusive Speaker mode is cancelled the audio channel of all muted participants is automatically restored MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition To designate or cancel a participant as the Exclusive Speaker e In the Browser Monitor or Status panes right click the Participant icon and then click Exclusive Speaker or Cancel Exclusive Speaker 3 a eee egal eos Sal Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Copy Participant Ctrl C Copy Participant pe Cut Ctrl xX Cut mare n Pz Delete Del Q amp A Management gt Mute Audio Ctrl eM Mute Video Mute oes Block Audio Block Audio Turn Off AGC Turn Off AGC Properties Properties In the Exclusive Speaker mode the selected participant becomes the conference speaker while all the other participants are automatically muted by the system The Exclusive Speaker icon a is displayed in the Audio column in the Monitor and Status pane The Muted by MCU icon q is displayed in the Audio column of all other participants Changing Participant s Status to Conference Chairperson During On Going Conferences operators can designate a participant to function as the conference chairperson The chairperson can perform various operations during the conference s
203. hapter 7 Attended Conferencing A list of conferences appears Disconnect Participant Ctrl T articipant Int l Finance Copy Participant Ctrl C Int l Marketing Cut Ctrl x Delete Del Exclusive Speaker Q amp A Management Attend F2 Hold To Home Conf F3 Mute Audio Ctrl m Mute Video Block Audio Turn OFF AGC Properties Click the name of the Home Conference to which to move the participant b Using the To Home Conference option in the right click menu Right click the icon of the attended participant and then click To Home Conf Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Move Participant b Copy Participant Ctrl C Cut Ctrl x Delete Del Exc peaker QBA Management gt Attend FZ To Home Conf F3 Mute Audio Ctri M Mute Video Block Audio Turn Off AGC Properties The participant connects to the Home conference and is removed from the Participants Queue and or the Operator conference The Attended or Hold icon in the Status column of the Monitor and Status panes disappears 7 38 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition To move a participant to his her Home conference from the Participants Queue tree or the Participants Queue window Standard MS Windows multiple selection techniques can be used in the following procedure 1 Display the list of participants in the Participants Queue in the Browser or Status pane or in the Participants Queue window 2 Move the participant to th
204. he Entry Queue voice messages and the conference IVR messages by adding the correct Numeric ID of destination conference and if necessary Conference Entry Password to the initial dial string e To be routed directly to the conference add the Numeric ID of the destination conference to the dial string Network Service Prefix EQ Numeric ID Destination Conference Numeric ID MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition For example if the H 323 Network Service prefix is 23 the Entry Queue ID is 1122 and the destination Conference ID is 2241 the dial string is 1001122 2241 To be routed directly to the conference and bypass the Entry Queue and the conference IVR queue add the Conference Entry password enclosed by pound signs to the dial string Network Service Prefix EQ Numeric ID Destination Conference Numeric ID Password For example if the Network Service Prefix is 100 the Conference Numeric ID of the Entry Queue is 1122 the Conference Numeric ID of the destination conference is 2241 and the Conference Entry Password is 4444 the dial string will be 1001122 2241 4444 5 21 Chapter 5 Meeting Rooms and Entry Queues 5 22 IVR and Entry Queue Services The Interactive Voice Response IVR application is a service that allows participants to communicate with the conferencing system over the telephone or an endpoint The IVR Service includes a set of voice prompts that allow support of multiple
205. he Q amp A Queue You can remove a participant from the Q amp A queue at any given time during the Q amp A session In such a case the session will continue as before but the removed participant will not be able to ask questions in this session To remove a participant from the Q amp A queue e Right click the participant s icon click Q amp A Management and then click Remove Participant from Q amp A or select the participant s icon and then click the Remove Participant E2 from Q amp A button 2 on the Q amp A toolbar The participant is deleted from the Q amp A queue and remains in the On Going Conference Clearing Q amp A Queues The chairperson and the operator can clear the Q amp A queue at any given time during the Q amp A session In that case all the participants currently waiting in the Q amp A queue are removed from the queue and they will not be able to ask questions in this session 4 42 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition To end the Q amp A session and clear the queue The Q amp A session can be ended by either the operator or the chairperson The operator clicks the Clear QA button 2 on the Q amp A toolbar The chairperson enters the appropriate DTMF code the default code is 24 Once the Q amp A queue is emptied the Q amp A session is over Participants revert to the standard status and icons according to their role Managing Voting Sessions In a voting session participants expr
206. he basic conference parameters such as name duration password and type of conference access Settings lets you define the conference media options and technical parameters such as audio algorithm and encryption Participants lets you set options for participant connections and add participants from the Participants database template file or define new participants 2 15 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants Meet Me per Conference lets you define the properties of Meeting Rooms and Meet Me Per Conferences This dialog box is enabled only when the Meet Me Per Conf option is selected in the General properties or when defining Meeting Rooms Recording lets you define recording options for the current conference If you are defining a conference that is accessed through an Entry Queue you do not need to define the Meet Me per Conference parameters General Properties In the Conference Properties General dialog box you can define the general properties of an Audio Only conference such as name duration conference type supported networks and passwords 3 Define the following General properties parameters Table 2 1 Conference Properties General Name Enter a unique name using up to 80 characters Naming the conference is mandatory Note If the same name is already used by another conference Meeting Room Entry Queue or Reservation in the s
207. he conference speaker Mute All OFF Played to the conference to inform all participants that they are unmuted and that the Mute All Except Me mode was cancelled Chairperson Exit Played to the conference when the chairperson exits the conference and the conference is automatically terminated Note This message is played only when the Terminate After Chairperson exits option is selected in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box End Time Alert Played to warn participants that the conference is about to end and cannot be extended Change Voice menu played when the participant requests to Passwords change the conference or chairperson password Menu detailing the steps required to complete this operation Change Conf This prompt requests the participant to enter a new Password conference password when the participant is attempting to modify the conference password Change This prompt requests the participant to enter a new Chairperson chairperson password when the participant is Password attempting to modify the chairperson password Confirm Requests the participant re enter the new password Password Change Change A message played when the participant entered an Password invalid password usually when the password is already Failure in use by another conference or chairperson Self Mute A confirmation message that is played when the participants request to mute their own line Self UnMute A confirmation message that is
208. he operator name currently connected to the MCU from the same workstation To define an On Going Operator conference 1 Right click the On Going Conferences icon and then click New Operator Conference On Going Conferences 1 New Conference New Operator Conference Print All Paste Cirit Cirit P The Conference Properties General dialog box opens POLYCOM Properties Product Management E x General Settings Participants Name POLYCOM Corf Entry Password E Duration MD H Web ChaipersonPasowort O Bing Numeric ID i MCU Product Management E User Defined 1 User Defined 2 To Meet Me Per Cont User Defined 3 Conference Type j Media p Supported Network C Standard Audio CR C Meeting Room Vides Audio P_ SDN ATM MPI Remarks Remarks History Cancel Apply Help 7 5 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing The conference type is set to Operator The name of the On Going Operator Conference or Reservation is taken from the Operator s login name This name cannot be modified No password is required Only one Operator Conference can be run for each login operator at any time 2 You can modify the conference duration In the Media box select Audio to create an Audio Only Operator conference 4 Click the Settings tab The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens
209. ications line using a transmission medium 1 Kops 1000 Bps BRI Basic Rate Interface A type of ISDN connection for transmitting data consisting of 3 channels two B channels each of 64 Kbps and one D channel 16 Kbps Carrier A telephone or other company that provides telecommunication transmission services Cascading The use of two MCUs in a multipoint video conference Conference allowing for multipoint conferences with more than 12 video participants A 2 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Abbreviation Explanation Term Channel Associated Signalling An interface for Audio Only conference participants See also T1 CAS CIF 4CIF QCIF Common Intermediate Format an optional part of the ITU T H 261 and H 263 standards CIF specifies 288 non interlaced luminance lines that contain 176 pixels CIF can be sent at frame rates of 7 5 10 15 or 30 per second When operating with CIF the amount of data to transmit cannot exceed 256 K bits where K equals 1024 The CIF video format has the capacity to transmit video images of 352x288 pixels at 36 45 Mbps and 30 frames per second A 4CIF format has four times the capacity of CIF QCIF has quarter the capacity of CIF Another term for span a T1 or E1 line Codec Coder decoder A device that converts voice and video into digital code and vice versa Refers to the endpoint video camera and video board that are used for video conferencing Conference Con
210. icipants at any time during the conference To enable this option the Roll Call option and fields must be enabled in the IVR Service assigned to the conference Note If the Roll Call option is disabled for the conference but enabled in the assigned IVR Service the participant name is still recorded since the Roll Call can be enabled by the chairperson during the On Going Conference MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 2 2 Conference Properties Basic Settings Continued Entry Tone Roll Call Announcement End Time Alert Tone x Min Exit Tone Roll Call Announcement Audio Mix Depth Select this option to play an audio tone to all connected participants when a new participant connects to the conference This tone is not heard by the connecting participant The tone is embedded in the MGC unit If the Roll Call option is enabled for the conference the Entry Tone is replaced by a playback of the recorded participant name followed by a message has joined the conference Select this option to play the end of conference reminder tone This tone is played once to all the connected participants x minutes before the end of the conference The tone is embedded in the MGC unit At the same time that the tone is played the Conference icon is replaced with the End of Conference icon Note If Auto Extend automatic extension of the conference is enabled for the MCU in the confer cfg sel
211. in and the Meet Me Per option is set to MCU conference the system automatically allocates the appropriate phone numbers from the list of dial in numbers defined in the Network Service that was selected for participants If the Meet Me Per option is set to Party or Channel and no CLI number is defined for the participant the system will reject the participant s call To toggle between Connection Types il In the Monitor pane Status pane or Browser pane list the participants defined for the conference 4 5 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 2 Right click the participant s icon whose connection type needs to be changed and then click Dial In or Dial Out depending on the participant s current definition mm Connect Participant Ctri R Move Participant gt Copy Participant Ctrl C Cut Ctrl x Delete Del Q amp A Management gt Properties The system toggles between dial in and dial out depending on the current participant connection type Disconnecting Participants from Conferences When participants do not need to continue with the conference you can remove them from the conference by e Disconnecting e Deleting When you disconnect a participant resources remain allocated to that participant and the defined properties are retained by the system s memory therefore you can easily reconnect the participant if necessary This is useful when participants want to
212. ine once they return to the conference muted This message is played once as a reminder when the participant has selected to return to the conference muted The default voice message is Press 6 at any time to unmute your line Note This message is enabled when the Return to the Conference Muted check box is selected MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 6 10 IVR Service Properties SilencelT Messages Continued SilencelT ees Description Message Adjust SilenceIT Select this check box to enable the option to adjust Sensitivity and reduce the SilencelT sensitivity and to return to the Unmute conference unmuted The noise detection sensitivity remains at the adjusted level until the end of the conference Then select the message that indicates the DTMF code to use The default voice message is Press 3 to reduce the noise detection level and return to the conference Disable SilencelT Select this check box to enable the option to disable and Unmute the SilencelT algorithm and return tot he conference unmuted Then select the message indicating the DTMF code to use The default voice message is Press 4 to disable noise detection and return to the conference Participant s Line Select this check box to enable the system to inform Detected as Noisy all participants that the line of participant X has been detected as noisy and has been muted and then select the appropriate message The d
213. ing State Peet Me Per Cont Recording Conference Status Empty IT One Participant At Most IT Not Full I Faulty Connection T Resources Deficiency Recording None Audio Source None Ze Exclusive Speaker C Cancel Apply Help You can view the following parameters Table 3 7 Conference Properties Ongoing State Conference Displays the possible problem statuses of a conference Status When a problem occurs during a conference for example a resource deficiency the selected check box indicates that status These statuses are also listed in the Connection column in the Monitor or the Status pane For more information about the Monitor pane columns see Table 3 2 on page 3 7 Recording If a recording port was defined for the conference displays the name of the participant port The recording port is used to connect to a recording device 3 25 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences Table 3 7 Conference Properties Ongoing State Continued Displays the name of the current speaker Exclusive Displays the name of the Exclusive Speaker who was Speaker designated for the conference 4 Click the Meet Me Per Conf tab to view the ISDN dial in number and which H323 prefix if there are IP participants was configured for the conference These numbers can be viewed in the Status pane For details see Table 3 1 on page 3 4 5 Click OK or Cancel to exit the On
214. ing it to the Favorites list If you are not satisfied with the filtering options you can modify them and preview the results before saving the filter Click OK to save the filter in the Favorites list 7 19 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing 7 20 Lg To use filters You can filter the list of participants displayed in the Participants Queue window at any time by selecting a different filter from the list of saved filters You must be logged into the appropriate databases to use existing pre defined filters For more information on how to log into the database see MGC Manager User s Guide Vol Chapter 3 Templates Database To filter the Participants Queue window select a filter from the list PARTICIPANTS QUEUE FILTER DELETE FILTER Personal Audio Only The Participants Queue match the selected filter participants that To modify a filter You can modify your personal filters or public filters if you have the appropriate permission and you are logged into the database 1 In the Filters list select the filter to modify and then click the Participants Queue Filter button The Participants Queue Filter dialog box opens 2 Select or deselect any of the filter criteria as needed 3 Click the OK button To delete a filter You can delete a personal filter or a public filter if you have the appropriate permission and you are logged into the database 1 Inthe Filters
215. ing the telephone or endpoint keypad participants enter the required details of the target conference and are then connected to that conference IVR Services can also be assigned to the target conference that are accessed from the Entry Queue In that case the participants are moved from the Entry Queue to the conference IVR Queue For a detailed description and examples how to connect and join conferences using IVR and Entry Queue services see Chapter 2 Conference Access for Dial in Participants on page 2 8 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition IVR Entry Queue Stages Participants in a conference using IVR for connecting automatically to the conference and for control functionality can be in one of the following statuses e Greeting the participant connects to the MCU enters the IVR queue and hears the audio messages of the menu If an Entry Queue is used for conference access the greeting stage may be made up of two steps general greeting in the Entry Queue and individual greeting in the IVR queue when connecting to conference e Conferencing the participant is connected to the conference In attended conferences two additional stages are available Attended and On Hold Attended status indicates that the participant is being assisted by the operator in an Operator Conference On Hold status indicates that the participant was placed on hold and hears background music while waiting for the operator If no
216. io files for each Message Type Each file must be Type are selected 6 In the Message Language Install to list select the language for which the audio file will be downloaded to the MCU The languages list includes the languages that were defined in the IVR Properties In the Message Category list select the category for which the audio file will be downloaded and then select the message type to be played Table 6 2 lists the available Message Categories and Message Types for each category Table 6 2 IVR Properties Message Types by Message Category Message wa Welcome General Welcome The first message played when Message Message the participant connects to the Entry Queue or conference Conference Welcome Played when the participant Message enters the conference MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 6 2 IVR Properties Message Types by Message Category Continued Message Category Conference Password Conference Chairperson General Operator Assistance Operator Assistance Message Type Request Password Retry Password Request Digit Chairperson Identifier Request Request Chairperson Password Chairperson Password Failure Message Description Requests the participant to enter the password required to connect to the conference Requests the participant to enter the password again when an incorrect password is entered Requests the participant to en
217. ion Cause Continued Video 0 Lists the disconnection cause categories for video Disconnection conferences that you can monitor in Audio Look and Reason Feel Describes the cause of disconnection according to the category indicated in the Video Disconnection Reason Possible Solution Indicates a possible course of action to enable participant s reconnection video conferences only 3 46 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences During an On Going Conference the MGC Manager operator can perform many management tasks at the conference level or at the participant level Operations at the participant level affect individual connections while those at the conference level affect several or all participants of the conference Operators can terminate a conference before the originally scheduled ending or extend its duration Alternatively they can disconnect an individual participant while the conference is in progress or temporarily mute the transmission to enable other participants to hold a private discussion Operators can establish an operator controlled dial out connection during the conference and add a new participants during session Some conference management tasks can also be performed by chairpersons from their endpoint using DTMF codes or the WebCommander application This chapter describes the activities and options available to the operator or the chairperson during an On Going Conference 4 1
218. ipant using the conference right click menu using the conference toolbar using the Conference Properties dialog box Add a defined participant from the Participant Database or from a User Template file For more details see Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties on page 2 49 Copy a participant from another conference or a conference template When defining a participant during an On Going Audio Only conference only the participant properties relevant to the type of conference to which the participant is added are enabled If the conference is a Meet Me Per conference undefined participants can connect to the conference directly or through an Entry Queue MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition To define a new participant Using the Conference right click menu a Expand the On Going Conferences list right click the icon of the conference to which to add the participant and then click New Participant Stop Monitoring Monitor Filter New Participant F8 erma Del Copy Conf Ctrl C Paste Participant Paste Participant As Ghl y Gtrl P Next Questioner Clear Q amp A Lock Go ence Mute Meet Me parties On Hold Voting Join to Gonference Fig Print Reservation Data Properties The Participant Properties dialog box opens Set up the required properties in the Identification and Advanced tabs of the Participants Properties dialog box For d
219. ipant Properties Connection Info1 Participant State The current connection status of the participant Note This status is indicated in the Monitor and Status panes For more details see Table 3 2 on page 3 7 Disconnect Depending on the current participant status in the Reconnect On Going Conference this button lets you disconnect or reconnect the participant Channels Status The status of the participant s audio channel according to the following parameters e Channel indicates the connection status of the audio channel A check mark next to the audio channel indicates that it is connected 3 30 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 3 9 ISDN Participant Properties Connection Info1 Continued Channels Status e Participant Phone in a dial in connection cont indicates the participant s CLI Calling Line Identification as identified by the MCU In a dial out connection indicates the participant s phone number dialed by the MCU MCU Phone In a dial in connection indicates the MCU number dialed by the participant In a dial out connection indicates the CLI number of the MCU as seen by the participant This number is entered in the MCU Number field in the ISDN Network Service configuration If required modify the following parameters disconnect the participant by clicking the Disconnect button To view general information regarding the participant connection and to mute or un
220. iption of the flag see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 5 Edit system cfg General Settings Advanced On Hold Select this option to place the conference on hold While in the On Hold state all the participants hear the background music Clear this check box to reinstate the conference Note A conference on hold can be released and placed on hold during an IVR enabled On Going Conference Enable Invite Select this option to enable the Invite feature When selected participants in the conference are able to invite new participants during the On Going Conference In this mode the participants are moved out of the conference temporarily and can dial out to the invitee Note This option can be enabled only during the conference definition stage of an IVR enabled conference SilencelT Enables automatic muting of noisy lines during IVR enabled conferences Conference Lock Select this option to lock the conference to undefined Meet Me dial in participants and prevent them from joining the conference once it has started Note A locked conference can be unlocked during an On Going Conference 2 24 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 2 2 Conference Properties Basic Settings Continued Field Option Mute Meet Me Parties Start Conference Requires Chairperson Terminate Conference after Chairperson Exits Auto Termination Before First Join X Min Select this option to
221. is done directly in the database and displays the label assigned to the participant The label is used for filtering the Participant Templates list in the database Non administrative users can assign only the labels assigned to them Users with administrator rights can assign any label created in the system The labels are defined by administrators in the MGC Database Manager module For detailed information on template types and use refer to the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume ll Chapter 7 Database Templates 4 Optional Click the Advanced tab The participant s Properties Advanced dialog box opens Default Participant Properties x Identification Advanced Service Name Sub Service Name Num type Node Type Taken from service zl Terminal z Recording None sa Encryption Off v M AGC IV Save Participant Cancel Help MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition 5 If required define the following parameters Table 2 11 ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS Participant Advanced Service Name Enter the name of the Network Service to be used to connect the ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS participant to the conference exactly as it is defined in the Network Service list the system is case sensitive If left blank the default Network Service is used depending on the selected connection type For example if the selected connection type is ISDN the default ISDN Network Service is used For more inf
222. is not played to the participant when the flag in the system cfg ROLL_CALL_CONFIRMATION YES default is set to NO e Roll Call is not supported with the Guidance feature or when the participant is moved from the Operator conference attended status to the Home Conference e Roll Call is not supported when the participant is moved from one conference to another The participant name is not announced when the participant leaves the first conference and enters the second conference e Roll Call is not supported with the Invite feature When a participant is invited to the conference by the chairperson the invitee name is not recorded and therefore not announced when the participant enters or leaves the conference or during the Roll Call Table 4 6 lists the Roll Call actions and the corresponding DTMF codes Table 4 6 Roll Call DTMF Options Default Operation DTMF Description Code Enable Roll Call 32 Enables the Roll Call feature for the conference Disable Roll Call Disabled the Roll Call feature for the conference However participants names are still recorded in case the Roll Call feature will be enabled later during the conference Roll Call Review Requests to play the recorded names of the Names participants connected to the conference one after the other in the order in which they entered the conference Roll Call Stop When requested the system stops the Roll Call Review Names playback 4 74 5
223. itor both unattended and attended conferences Participants in unattended conferences usually connect to a conference without the operator s assistance In an unattended conference with an assigned IVR Service operations are performed using DTMF codes and or are managed by the chairperson of the conference Unattended participants can be in two states Greeting and Conferencing In attended conferences the connection to the conference is controlled by the Operator In this mode the participants are moved from one stage to another by the operator using one of the following methods e interactive drag and drop e using the right click pop up menu e using the Participants Queue window For detailed description of attended Audio Only conferences see Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Listing On Going Conferences in the Status Pane The On Going Conferences category lists all the On Going Conferences currently running on the MCU You can view the status of the conferences either by expanding the On Going Conferences tree or by listing the conferences in the Status pane To view On Going Conferences in the Status pane 1 Inthe Browser pane expand the MCU tree 2 Click the On Going Conferences icon A list of On Going conferences is displayed in the Status pane m Sales2 Minor es MCU Configuration Bo ACCORD 3 i Weekly ar EQ Demo_874 000 re EQ Demo_
224. k the icon of the participant to be moved to the Operator conference and then click Attend or Attend with Details Attend ACCORD F2 Attend With Details ACCORD Hold To Home Conf Audio 1 Fa Delete Del Stop Monitoring If you click Attend the participant is moved to the Operator conference and still appears in the Participants Queue If you click Attend with Details the participant is moved to the Operator conference and still appears in the Participants Queue In addition the Attended Participant window opens For more details see The Attended Participants Dialog Box on page 7 21 The participant is moved to the Operator conference while his her icon remains in the conference list and in the Participants Queue list An Exclamation point appears next to the Participant icon in the Name column of all panes and in the conference tree rege In addition the Attended icon rit is displayed in the Status column of the Participants Queue in the Monitor and Status panes Moving a Participant to the Home Conference To move participants to their Home conferences from the Operator conference list 1 In the Browser Status or Monitor panes display the list of participants in the Operator conference Use one of the following options a Using the Move option in the right click menu Right click the icon of the attended participant to be moved to the Home conference and then click Move 7 37 C
225. l Exclusive Speake Q amp A Management b Mute Audio Ctrl M Turn Off AGC Properties A message appears requesting you to confirm the deletion Click Yes to delete the selected participant The participant s name disappears from the participants list in the Monitor Status and Browser panes To reconnect the participant who has been deleted from a conference you must add this participant to the conference as a new participant Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Naming Undefined Dial in Participants The MGC Manager automatically assigns names to all dial in participants who were not defined prior to the start of the conference undefined participants once they connect to the conference This default name is derived from the conference name and a sequential number You can edit the automatically assigned name to correctly display it in the Monitor and Status panes The name change is also updated in the Call Detail Record CDR which is used for billing Usually the operator changes the name while attending the participant in the Operator conference You can also change participants names when they are waiting in the Entry Queue or when they are connected to the conference To name a Meet Me dial in participant 1 List the participants in the Operator conference in an On Going Conference or in the Participants Queue 2 Right click the participant icon and then click Properties 3
226. l Enter to Conference JOIN ACA Roll Call Exit from Conference Roll Call Start Names Review Roll Call End of Names Revi Roll Call Enter to ioINACA 3 v Add Message File a ES 6 31 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services 6 32 The Roll Call feature of the IVR Message Service is used to record the participants names for playback when the participants join and leave a conference or when the chairperson requests the Roll Call Participants connecting to the conference are asked to record their name 20 To enable this option select Enable Roll Call 21 To assign the audio file to the message type click the appropriate entry The Message Type appears at the bottom of the table and the drop down list displays the names of the audio files stored in the MGC memory If the Roll Call option is enabled all its Message Types must be assigned the appropriate audio files 22 From the drop down list select the appropriate audio file Table 6 9 IVR Service Properties Roll Call Messages Roll Call Message Description Roll Call Record Requests the participant to state the name for recording when the participant connects to the conference Note The recording is automatically terminated after two seconds Roll Call Verify Verification message added to the playback of the Record recorded name The name you have recorded is Roll Call Confirm Prompts the participant to confirm the recorde
227. lays the percentage of participants who voted for each of choice out of the total number of connected participants 4 47 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Table 4 3 Voting Results Parameters Continued Show Results as Select this option to display the absolute number of Number of Votes votes cast for each choice Details Results Click this button to display a summary of the voting results Note Detailed results can be viewed only when the voting stage is completed 7 Click the Stop Voting button to conclude the voting session Alternatively chairpersons can end the voting session by entering the appropriate DTMF code default DTMF code is 81 The voting results are displayed on the screen and can be saved to a text file At this point you can select one of the following options in the Voting window using the command buttons Click Restart Voting to restart the voting on the same subject for example if the previous voting session was interrupted or if you need to recount the votes A new voting stage starts immediately using the current settings Click New Vote to start a new voting subject The current settings are cleared from the Voting Settings pane Repeat the preparation stage procedure as described in Conducting a Voting Session on page 4 44 Click Results to display full information about the voting results Click Save Results to save the results to a text
228. lick Hold To Home Conf Polycom F3 Move Operator Guidance gt Delete Del Stop Monitoring The Participant icon changes to Hold in the Status column of the Home conference participants list in the Monitor and Status panes and in the Participants Queue 7 41 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing Performing Operations Using the Participants Queue Toolbar You can perform operations using the Participants Queue toolbar from the following panes and lists Browser Status and Monitor panes On Going Conferences list e Browser and Status panes Participants Queue list e Participants Queue window To move a participant or place him her on hold using the Participants Queue toolbar Standard MS Windows multiple selection techniques can be used in the following procedure 1 Select the participant s icon 2 Click the relevant button in the Participants Queue toolbar as follows Table 7 7 Participants Queue Toolbar Buttons ee To move the participant to the Operator conference To place the attended participant on Hold To move the participant to the Home destination conference For further details on the individual operations refer to the explanations in the section Performing Operations using the Right Click Menu on page 7 36 7 42 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Performing Operations Using Shortcut Keys Standard MS Windows multiple selection techniques can be u
229. lly by the meeting organizer or by the operator or automatically by the system In the automatic blast dial out mode the system treats the participants as a group and calls them all to connect them to the conference Dial out participants must be defined by the meeting organizer or operator usually during the conference definition Conference Access for Dial in Participants A conference may be accessed directly by dial in participants or through an Entry Queue or conference IVR queue 2 8 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Direct Dial In Access Participants can dial directly into the conference using the following methods e Using the MCU dial in number and defining the participants prior to the conference start Participants are provided with the MCU dial in number When they connect to the MCU they are routed to their corresponding conference according to their Calling Line Identifier CLD number e Meet Me Per Conference Assigning a dial in number to each conference and defining the conference as Meet Me allowing undefined participants to connect to the conference MCU Conference1 Numeric ID 1222 Dial in number 9251222 ISDN PSTN Endpoint lt i Conference2 Numeric ID 1223 Dial in number 9251223 ISDN PSTN Endpoint IP Network Service Prefix 925 Figure 2 1 Direct Conference Access The meeting organizer or operator assigns a dial in phone number to each conference designated
230. lowing parameters Mute or unmute the participant Click the H 245 or SDP tab for SIP participants tab to view the capabilities exchange results between the participant endpoint and the conference MCU It is a monitoring only tab The Participant Properties H245 tab opens ALPO Identification Advanced Connection Infot Identification Advanced Connection Info Connection Info2 Connection Info2 H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Video Sources SDP Disconnection Cause Resource Details r Remote Capabilities 1g7221_32k 1 p Remote Communication Mode Remote Capabilities Remote Communication Mode siren14_48k invalid FPP g722_64k 60 RTP payload type h263 313300 Bps siren14_32k invalid FPP CIF at 30 fps RTP payload type siren 4_24k invalid FPP RTP payload type 97221 _32k invalid FPP RTP payload type g7221_24k invalid FPP RTP payload type g722_64k invalid FPP g728 invalid FPP h264 377000 Bps BaseLine Profile Level 1 2 CustomMaxMBPS at 20 1000 Local Communication Mode h263 377000 Bps 3722 64k 60 1263 377000 Bps a 4CIF at 15 fps CIF at 30 fps CIF at 30 fps QCIF at 30 fps SQCIF at 30 fps RTP payload type h261 377000 Bps CIF at 30 fps QCIF at 30 fps lt OK Cancel Apply OK Cancel 3 43 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences The following information is displayed
231. lso called a robbed bit signaling line or a pre ISDN line A 6 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Abbreviation Explanation Term 7 120 A standard for data and application sharing Users can share and manipulate data as if they were in the same room T1 CAS T1 Line An 1 5 Mb digital switched line used in the United States WAN Wide Area Network A communications network that services a geographical area larger than the LAN Whiteboard An on screen shared notebook for placement of shared documents A 7 Appendix A Glossary
232. mbers iP Connection Type Audio Video Sync Tx Rate WD Disc H323 172 22 172 74 5a Dial out qi o Fe Hold D Con H323 172 22 172 13 get Dial out qi OK 7 7 o Audio O Cold A con ISON 79320 Bet viarout 4i OK 64 64 a Audio Ready Portso NM 4 7 34 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Browser and Status pane Participants Queue list anag EI FA Sy File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help x Oe 35 73 24 2 ela 5fai FORE SPANT peere riven fan 5 Product management Normal PEA Mu Configuration m B On Going Conferences 4 gaan Attended Wrong conference passw N i amiT D Debbie Onhold On hold by operator Conn E B budget aan 8 Debbie Donald 3 Debbie an koen Finance Be Alan a3 Attend DY Faul H323 172 22 172 74 52 Dial out Be Debbie Hold D Con H323 172 22 169 72 et Diaout donald AD Disc H323 172 22 172 13 e diatout Ready Sep 21 2005 02 0 Sep 21 2005 10 3 4i 4i di OK 7 7 o Audio OK 7 7 o Audio 3 Participants Queue window Participants Queue Prod Mgmt 172 22 138 116 Bg vebbie Attended On hold by IVR Faulty connected Dec 10 2003 15 18 35 Audio 1 Q lz Onhold On hold by IVR Connected Dec 10 2003 15 19 57 Audio 1 9 Michelle Onhold On hold by IVR Connected Dec 10 2003 15 18 40 Audio 1 a Zoe Onhold Ask
233. messages are recorded for the chairperson operation This file will be played after the file assigned to the Chairperson Help Menu 1 The audio file listing DTMF codes that can be used by the participant The length of a voice message that can be recorded for a Help file is limited to 30 seconds To overcome this limitation two audio files can be played one after another as a single menu Participant Menu 1 is the first file that will be played 15 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 6 7 IVR Service Properties General Messages Continued Message Type Message Description Participant The audio file listing additional DTMF codes that can be Menu 2 used by the ordinary participant when two help menu messages are recorded for the participant operation This file will be played after the file that was assigned to the Participant Menu 1 Invite Help Menu The audio file listing DTMF codes available to the participant or the chairperson during the nvite session Voting Help The audio file listing DTMF codes available to the Menu participant or the chairperson who controls the voting session depending on the configuration in the DTMF codes dialog box Maximum A message indicating that the participant cannot join Participants the destination conference as the maximum allowed Exceeded number of participants will be exceeded Recording in A message indicating to the connecting participant that Progres
234. ms or require the operator s assistance Participants may need your assistance when they are unable to connect to the conference when manual dial out is selected for a conference when they have requested help placed on hold when their line is noisy or when waiting in the Q amp A Queue To display only the filtered participants in the Monitor pane 1 Expand the On Going Conferences list 2 Right click the icon of the conference whose participants you want to monitor and then click Monitor Filter Stop Monitoring Monitor Filter New Participant F8 Terminate Del Copy Conf Ctrl C aste Participant Gtrl y Participant 4s Gtrl P Lock Conference Mute Meet Me parties On Hold Voting Join to Conference F10 Print Reservation Data Properties The Participant Monitoring Filter dialog box opens Participants Monitoring Filter x MFaulty participant MParticipants Requesting Assistance Asked question MQNoisy Line 3 17 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences By default all check boxes are selected to monitor all participants who require the operator s attention Clear the check boxes to indicate the participant statuses that you do not want to monitor You can request to monitor any or all options The following statuses may be monitored Table 3 5 Monitored Participant Statuses Faulty Participant Participant who has problems connecting to the confe
235. ms two main functions translates LAN alias addresses of terminals and gateways to IP addresses and provides bandwidth management H 221 ITU T standard that defines how to multiplex video audio control and user data into one serial bit stream H 230 ITU T standard that defines simple multipoint control systems procedures and describes network maintenance functions H 231 ITU T standard that defines a set of MCU functions and operational requirements H 242 ITU T standard that defines initiation of communications between systems and capabilities negotiation procedures H 243 ITU T standard that defines initiation of communications between systems and capabilities negotiation procedures in multipoint conferences H 261 ITU T standard that defines the Px64 video coding algorithm H 263 ITU T standard that provides improved compression and quality of video images at a line rate lower than 384 Kbps This standard is not supported by all codecs H 264 A proprietary Polycom Video compression standard H 264 ITU T standard that provides improved compression and quality of video images in lower line rate connections and is part of the Highest Common mechanism in Video Switching conferences A 4 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition rem Explanation Term H 320 ITU T standard that defines how the H series video conferencing recommendations work together H 323 ITU T standard for audio video and data communications acros
236. mute the participant s audio channel click the Connection Info2 tab 3 31 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences The Participant Properties Connection Info2 dialog box opens Polycom 2428 _ 000 Properties a Identification Advanced Connection Info Connection Info2 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Connection Time 2003 11 00 57 AME Disconnection Time Connection Retries Left r Mute By Operator y Attending I Audio T Oper Participant p Mute By Participant I Audio J TE Arendina T Participant Attending State Audio On Hold The following information is displayed for the connected participant Table 3 10 ISDN Participant Properties Connection Info2 Connection Time The date and time the participant connected to the conference Note The time format is derived from the operating system s time format Disconnection The date and time of participant s disconnection Time Connection The number of retries left for the system to connect Retries Left the participant to the conference 3 32 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 3 10 ISDN Participant Properties Connection Info2 Continued Attending The participant or operator status in a conference with an assigned IVR Service e Oper Participant This option is checked when viewing the operator parameters Attending This option is checked when the participant is in a
237. n Infol Connection Info2 Disconnection Cause and Resource Details the H 245 tab is included for H 323 participants and the corresponding SDP tab is included for SIP participants These tabs contain information that is relevant only to the participant status while the conference is running and are used mainly to monitor the participant s status when connection problems occur In Audio Look and Feel you can monitor video participants as well as Audio Only To monitor the status of VoIP participant 1 3 38 In the Monitor Status or Browser pane right click the participant icon and then click Properties The Participant s Properties Identification dialog box appears Audio party Properties Connection intog f H245 Tpisconnectn Cause Resource Details Identification Bdvanced Connection Infot Planning Dept 1 Properties Connection Info Cor TY isconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Rdvanced Connection Infot Name Name Jaudio party Planning Dept 1 Connection Type Terlace Type Conner vps piace Type Diakin hd SIP f Dial out x a ENGAR Participant IP am Pe art ee 255 255 255 255 S060 SIP Address Address Type Extension Identifier String Extension Identifier String SIP URI m User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 1 User Defined 2 Planning Dept head local office User Defined 3 User Defined 4 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broad
238. n have up to two participants only the operator and the participant It must be running before the attended conference is set up The Operator Conference is required when e The operator needs to talk to the participant to obtain the participant s personal information such as name email address etc To manage the participants waiting in the participants Queue When the participant has requested help and the operator wants to talk to him her 7 3 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing 7 4 Table 7 1 Attended Conference Entities Continued IVR Service set to Wait for operator assistance EQ service set for Wait for operator assistance The IVR Service assigned to the conference must be set to On Hold for Operator Assistance in the Welcome Message dialog box In this mode when the participants connect to the conference they are automatically moved to the Participants Queue The Entry Queue Service assigned to the attended Entry Queue must be set to On Hold for Operator Assistance option in the Welcome Message dialog box In this mode when the participants connect to the Entry Queue they are automatically moved to the Participants Queue where they wait for the operator to connect them to the conference MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Defining an Operator Conference You can define an Operator Conference directly or define an operator reservation The Operator conference name is derived from t
239. n the Conference Defaults definition see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume IT Using a Database 6 Define the following basic settings Table 2 2 Conference Properties Basic Settings General Settings Basic Encryption If you are defining an IP Only conference select this option to enable data encryption on the conference level In that case all participants must be encrypted in order to connect to the conference Note This option is enabled only in IP Only conferences For a detailed description see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 2 22 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 2 2 Conference Properties Basic Settings Continued Enable IVR Select this option to enable IVR Interactive Voice Service Response Services for the conference IVR Services enable voice menus for guiding participants connections to conferences and interacting with the conference from the participant or chairperson telephone using touch tone telephone codes DTMF When the IVR Service option is enabled additional fields are activated When the IVR Service is disabled the participants are unable to use DTMF codes to control the conference or perform any operation during the conference If IVR Service is disabled and the Entry Queue Access is enabled participants connect to the conference directly from the Entry Queue If IVR Service and Entry Queue Access
240. n the Status column in the Monitor and Status panes and the Release On Hold Conference button E is displayed in the Conference toolbar SE MCUs Network H ug Product Management Major r MCU Configuration a On Hold A On Going Conferences 1 re Participants Queue 0 Reservations 0 F All connected participants hear background music until the conference is reinstated When the conference is reinstated all the conference statuses and icons are updated accordingly To place an On Going Conference On Hold Using the Conference right click menu a Expand the On Going Conferences list b Right click the icon of the conference to place On Hold and then click On Hold fs Polycom Audio Conference Monitor Monitor Filter New Participant F8 Terminate Del Copy Conf Ctrl C Paste Participant Ctr Paste Participant As Ctri P Next Questioner Clear Q amp A Lock Conference te M Conference Fig Print Reservation Data Properties The On Going Conference is placed on hold immediately 4 51 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 4 52 To reinstate the conference expand the On Going Conferences list and then right click the icon of the conference that is currently on hold and then click Release Hold Using the Conference Toolbar a Expand the On Going Conferences list and click the icon of the confe
241. n the callers dial in either the conference dial in number or MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition string they are routed to the appropriate conference and they enter the conference IVR queue In the IVR Queue they are prompted to enter the conference password and other information which they enter using the telephone touch tone keypads The callers are admitted to the conference when they have keyed in the appropriate conference password and or chairperson password In the system such a conference may be defined as e Standard with IVR Service e Meeting Room with IVR Service Conference Access for Dial out Participants In unattended Audio Only conferences with no IVR Service assigned to them dial out participants operator dial out or system dial out are connected directly to the conference without going through an Entry Queue or an IVR Queue In IVR enabled Audio Only conferences or in conferences designated as Entry Queue Access dial out participants enter the VR queue where they may be requested to enter the conference password or any digit to confirm the connection 2 13 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants Defining New On Going Audio Conferences This section describes how to define a new Standard Audio Only conference An Audio card must be installed in your MGC unit in order to run an Audio Only conference that uses the IVR Service To define an On Going
242. n the moment that the End of Conference Reminder is displayed and the scheduled end of the conference is a predefined parameter that you can configure using the Conf Alert function of the MGC Manager Options menu To define the End of Conference Reminder 1 On the Options menu click Conf Alert The Conference End Time Alert dialog box opens Conference End Time Alert x End Conf Alert Min 5 ox Ea 2 Inthe End Conf Alert field enter or select the value that defines how many minutes before the end of the conference the End of Conference Reminder is activated For example if you enter 5 the End of Conference Reminder icon will be displayed five minutes before the end of the conference Entering 0 disables the appearance of the warning icon 3 Click OK to apply the setting From this point on the system will display the End of Conference Reminder icon x minutes where x is the value entered in the End Conf Alert field before the end of any On Going Conference The icon remains on display until the conference ends You can extend the duration of the On Going Conference when needed For details see Chapter 4 Changing the Conference Duration on page 4 54 2 48 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Defining Participant Properties New participants can be defined directly during the conference definition or during the On Going Conference You can also define participant templates either in the Pa
243. n to select the audio file aca to download The Select Source File dialog box opens Look in amp Local Disk C Je amp im E Captures _V4 21x J Accord Official Manuals Backup word CI ADOBEAPP Catalog Numbers Alpha 03 C comet C Alpha 17 L Config Msi Audio _Bridge Corel CI Captures v3 0 E corelprawe ooo Files of type gt Cancel Z File name 6 15 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services 6 16 10 11 12 13 14 Select the appropriate audio file of type aca using the standard Windows conventions and then click the Open button The name of the selected file appears in the Jnstall field in the Install File dialog box In the Install File dialog box click Yes to download the file to the MCU memory The system returns to the Add Message File dialog box Repeat steps 9 to 11 for each additional audio message to be downloaded to the MCU Repeat steps 3 to 8 for each additional language to be added to the MCU Once all the audio files are downloaded to the MCU close the Add Message File dialog box and return to the IVR Properties dialog box In the IVR Properties dialog box click OK MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Setting IVR Message Services The MGC system is shipped with default IVR Service and audio files An IVR Message Service contains the audio message set for the menu driven scripts and music input from an external device
244. nager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition The following information is displayed for the disconnected participant Table 3 12 ISDN Participant Properties Disconnection Cause Call Lists the reasons for participant s disconnection Disconnection e Operator Disconnect The participant was Reason disconnected from the conference by the operator No Net Connection Network channels could not be connected This reason may occur when the telephone lines are unavailable or busy Participant Hang Up The participant disconnected himself from the conference Bad H 243 Connection Problems occurred with the connection protocol Resource Deficiency Hardware resources audio or network cards are insufficient and cannot handle the conference Security Failure Encryption related problem prevented the connection Not relevant to ISDN Audio Only participant Describes the cause of disconnection according to the category indicated in the Call Disconnection Reason For example when Operator Disconnect is selected the name of the Cause field is changes to Operator Name and lists the name of the operator who disconnected the participant 3 37 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences Checking the Status of VoIP Participants The various properties of a VoIP H 323 or SIP participant can be viewed using the same method used to display the ISDN participant properties In addition to the Identification Advanced Connectio
245. nce Everyone Everyone Everyone Everyone Everyone MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Using DTMF Codes in Cascading Conferences During Cascaded conferences the chairperson can control all the participants in the cascaded conference by performing the following tasks using DTMF codes e Set the chairperson as the conference s exclusive speaker while muting all the other conference participants e Terminate the conference e Lock or unlock the conference to undefine dial in participants e Secure a conference and release a secured conference e Place the conference on hold and reinstate the conference If the chairperson uses any other DTMF codes only the participants in the chairperson s local conference will be affected For more information on simple cascading see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 For a detailed description of H 243 Cascading conferences see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 5 Modifying Conference and Chairperson Passwords During an On Going Conference the Conference and Chairperson passwords can be modified by the chairperson or a participant depending on the configured permissions using DTMF codes from their endpoints default DTMF code is 77 Passwords can also be modified by the operator via the MGC Manager For more details see Modifying Conference and Chairperson Passwords on page 4 69 When the chairperson activates the passw
246. nces simultaneously It displays additional parameters and you can filter the display to show only those participants requiring operators assistance Monitoring the Conference and Participant Status To view the status of conference participants in the Status pane 1 Inthe Browser pane expand the On Going Conferences tree ug Sales2 Minor H Be MCU_Config ar EQ Demo_874 000 8 EQ Demo_878 000 8 EQ Demo_878 001 3 5 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences 2 Click the icon of the conference whose participants to display in the Status pane MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 13 File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help S ep a Nal All jese a Ne B Network Phone IP Connection Retries Left _ 1D L Alpha 02 Alpha 06 Normal j connected 79320 Bes Dial out 0 3 tecal mac 25 D gt Connected 9054803856 5a Dial out 0 2 mec 2s8 E Prod mgmt Normal H Ba mcu Configuration 19 Conferences 2 H A Deere BD Participants Queue o H Reservations 1 zi ey Meeting Rooms 10 To display the status of conference participants in the Monitor pane 1 In the Browser pane expand the On Going Conferences list 2 Right click the icon of the conference to monitor and then click Monitor to view all the conference participants in the monitor pane Monitor Filter
247. nd manual monitoring e On the Options menu click Monitor All to activate automatic monitoring Options Window Help Communication Conf Alert Beep on faults Drag confirmation Set Reservation Creator Crees D ontigure Indications Configure Shortcuts Stop Current Indication Repeating A check mark next to Monitor All indicates that the option is activated Each click of the Monitor All option enables or disables this option Secure Conference Mode The Secure mode locks the conference and prevents participants and operators from joining the conference A secured conference cannot be monitored or controlled in any way However operators can terminate the conference even when the conference is in this mode While the conference is in the Secure mode the operator cannot view the participants list or any other conference properties The conference chairpersons can enable or disable the Secure mode from their DTMF input device touch tone telephone or the endpoint s remote control using the appropriate DTMF code 70 During the secure conference the chairperson and participants can perform various operations 3 19 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences 3 20 such as voting question and answer sessions via their DTMF input device using the appropriate DTMF codes However because of the mode these operations or status changes are not displayed in the MGC Manager Monitor pane Only conference s
248. ndication All conference participants are now ALLMUTE ACA of a Mute all but muted me operation General Indication All conference participants are now ALLUNMTE ACA of a Un Mute all unmuted but me operation General The chairperson has left the CHAIRDRP ACA Chairperson conference dropped General End time The conference is about to end ENDALERT ACA alert 6 55 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 6 16 Default IVR Messages Continued General Change Press 1 to change conference PINCHANG ACA password menu password Press 2 to change chairperson password Press 9 to exit the menu General Enter Please enter the new conference NEWPIN ACA new conference password Press the pound key password when complete General Enter Please enter the new chairperson NEWCHAIR ACA new chairperson password Press the pound key password when complete General Re enter Please re enter the new password NEWCNFRM ACA new chairperson Press the pound key when password complete General New The new password is invalid NEWINVLD ACA password invalid General The password has been NEWOK ACA Successful successfully changed password change confirmation General The conference is now locked LOCKED ACA Conference locked General The conference is now unlocked UNLOCKED ACA Conference unlocked General The
249. nection between two or more endpoints exchanging video and audio information If only two endpoints are involved a conference is called point to point and no MCU is required If more than two endpoints are involved it is called a multipoint conference and an MCU Multipoint Control Unit is required as the management system See also MCU CSU Channel Service Unit Customer provided equipment that is used as an interface between a communication network and the data terminal D Channel The channel in a span or in a group of spans which is used to transmit signaling information between the public or private switch and the MGC 100 Dual Tone Multi Frequency A system of coded signals used by touch tone telephones in which a specific sound frequency or tone is assigned to each key so that the signal can be easily recognized by a computer The codes enable data input and control of voice processing systems DTMF signals can pass through the entire connection to the destination device and therefore are used for remote control after the connection with the MCU is established A 3 Appendix A Glossary Abbreviation T Explanation Term An 2 Mb digital switched line used in Europe Endpoint An endpoint is any conferencing unit or participating connected party G711 ITU T audio algorithm 64Kbps 3 4 kHz G722 ITU T audio algorithm 64Kbps 7 kHz G728 ITU T audio algorithm 16Kbps 3 4 kHz Gatekeeper A type of server that perfor
250. ned participants mainly dial out either from a template or to define a new participant If Meet Me Per Conference is selected access this tab if you want to define the number of participants for which the system should save resources and the maximum number of participants allowed to connect to this conference For details see Defining Participant Properties on page 2 49 9 Ifthe Meet Me Per Conference option was selected in the General tab click the Meet Me Per Conf tab The Conference Properties Meet Me Per Conf dialog box appears This tab appears only if the Meet Me Per Conference option is selected in the General tab 10 Define the Meet Me Per Conf parameters as described in MGC Manager User Guide Vol I Chapter 2 11 Click OK to complete the Reservation definition The new Reservation is added to the Reservations list 2 43 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants Defining Recurrent Reservations You can set up conferences to occur repeatedly by defining the recurrence pattern frequency and day and range number of recurrences or the date on which they will end The number of duplicate reservations is derived from the number of occurrences defined for the reservation Each duplicate includes the same parameters of the original conference however except for the Conference Name you can modify these parameters for the individual conference Defining the Reservation Recur
251. nferences according to their CLI number defined in the Participant Numbers field This option should be used only with PBXs supporting the CLI option Continued User Defined In any or all of the four User Defined fields enter fields 1 4 general information for the participant such as the participant s email address telephone number company name location or any required information The titles of the User Defined fields can be modified in the Database Manager gt Defaults gt User Defined Defaults and loaded to the MGC Manager application Note The User Defined fields are displayed only if the Show User Defined Fields in Participant Parameters box is selected in the Database Manager gt Defaults gt User Defined Defaults Broadcasting You can control the volume of the audio transmitted Volume Listening from the participant to the conference broadcasting Volume volume as well as the listening volume for the participant To adjust the volume move the slider The volume scale is from 1 to 10 where 1 is the weakest and 10 the strongest volume The volume of each endpoint s audio at connection time is set to 5 One movement of the volume slider increases or decreases the volume by one unit equivalent to 3db 2 54 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 2 10 ISDN PSTN T1 CAS Properties and Identification Dialog Box Audio Only When checked indicates an Audio Only participant This option is
252. nferences list or the Reservations list 2 You can print details using one of the following options In the Reservations list right click the Reservation icon and then click Print Reservation Reservations 6 H E es New Participant F8 Copy Res Paste Participant Ghrl y Paste Participant As Chl P Delete Del Delete All Reservation recurrences Print Reservation H Properties 4 59 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Inthe On Going Conferences list right click the conference icon and then click Print Reservation Data Stop Monitoring Monitor Filter New Participant F8 Terminate Del Copy Conf Ctrl C Paste Participant Ctrl V Paste Participant As Ctrl P Lock Conference Mute Meet Me parties On Hold Voting Join to Conference F10 Print Reservation Data Properties The Print dialog box opens xl Report To File Printer ClipBoard Cancel Name Of Operator 3 Inthe Name Of Operator field enter the name of the operator who initiated the report 4 In the Report To options select the report destination File to print data to a text file Printer to print data to the default or other printer Clipboard to copy data to the clipboard from where it can be pasted in other text handling applications 5 Click OK If File is selected the Save As dialog box opens a Save the
253. ng s organizer The chairperson interacts with other participants in the same conference and can control the conference using a Web browser or the DTMF codes Chairpersons perform all the functions of the standard participant but have additional privileges They can start a voting session grant the floor to participants who wish to ask questions mute and unmute participants connect and disconnect participants define themselves participant as the conference speaker while muting all other participants and place participants on hold Some chairperson functions can be performed only via the Web browser Functions that can be performed using the DTMF codes are determined in the IVR Service Operator can perform all the chairperson s functions and additional operator specific functions The operator can control and monitor all On Going Conferences simultaneously as well as perform general configuration and maintenance operations but does not have to participate in a conference in order to control it During On Going Conferences the operator can move participants from one conference to another assist participants who need help terminate the conference before its scheduled time and join the conference In addition operators can identify participants as VIPs move them up or down in the Q amp A queue and give them special attention Operators perform all activities via the MGC Manager or the MGC WebCommander Chapter 2 Defining Standard Au
254. ng Rooms can be manually terminated at any time by the MGC Manager operator or by the conference chairperson via the WebCommander or by using the appropriate DTMF code Meeting Rooms can be defined in the MGC Manager and in the WebCommander application 5 1 Chapter 5 Meeting Rooms and Entry Queues The ISDN PSTN T1 CAS dial in numbers allocated to a Meeting Room can be automatically allocated by the MCU based on the dial in numbers allocated to it by the carrier or manually during the Meeting Room definition Once the Meeting Room is saved on the MCU the conference chairperson or the first participant who dials into the conference automatically activates it Other participants can join the conference by dialing in to it If dial out participants are also defined for this conference the system automatically dials out to these participants when the conference is activated The operator or conference chairperson can lock the conference to additional dial in participants at any time When the conference is terminated the system checks the Meeting Room recurrence settings If the Meeting Room is still valid for re activation the Meeting Room remains inactively in the system waiting for another initiating call Otherwise the Meeting Room is deleted from the system when the conference ends An operator can delete the Meeting Room through the MGC Manager to prevent its re activation The number of Meeting Rooms is limited to about 2000 If y
255. ng Methods The MCU system supports both scheduled and on demand conferences Scheduled conferences are arranged ahead of time or just before the conference starts On demand conferencing enables participants to immediately start and connect to an On Going Conference from their endpoint with no advanced scheduling Scheduled Conferences Scheduled conferences are arranged ahead of time or just before the conference starts The scheduling can be done by means of the MGC Manager application by using the Web based WebCommander application or by means of Microsoft Outlook using the MGC Personal Scheduler Add On These conferences are deleted from the MCU when they end On Demand Conferencing The MGC environment offers two methods for on demand conferencing e Ad Hoc Conferencing e Meeting Rooms 2 1 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants In Ad Hoc conferencing participants connect to an Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue Meeting Rooms are conferences that have no allocated resources on the MCU or a starting date and time They are created once but remain on the MCU in Passive mode and can be activated as many times as required When the conference ends the conference reverts to the passive Meeting Room mode until the next activation It remains in the MCU memory configuration and in the Meeting Rooms list For a detailed description of Ad Hoc Conferencing see MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II
256. nnect them to the conference Usually the Attended mode is configured either at the Entry Queue level or the conference level but not for both The On Going Conference can also be managed by the conference participants or the chairperson without the operator s assistance The operations that can be performed by the participants and chairperson are configured in the IVR Service assigned to the conference Participants Queue In the Participants Queue the system lists participants who require the operator s assistance to connect to the conference during the conference or were placed on hold in any conference regardless of the conference they belong to The Participants Queue is intended for Attended conferences Using special toolbars command buttons and options provided in the Participants Queue window the operator can easily connect participants to their destination Home conference Conference Types There are three types of conferences e Standard is a conference that is started once and when the conference ends it is deleted from the MCU You can schedule a series of recurring reservations with the same parameters for each reservation in the series Once defined each of the reservations is treated as a single unique reservation that can be modified except for its name or deleted from the MCU For detailed description of Reservations and recurring Reservations see Scheduling a New Reservation on page 2 41 e Mee
257. nnecting When the connection is established the participant s status and icon changes to Connected Name Status Connection a Duke D Connected a Lynne JD Disconnected d MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Use this procedure to reconnect participants who were previously disconnected from the conference or failed to connect to the conference If you have difficulties connecting dial out ISDN participants ensure that the specific switch used for the connection does not require the addition of the pound key at the end of the dial string If it does modify the properties of the disconnected participant and then try again to connect For a description of all the participants connection status indications and icons see Table 3 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns page 3 7 Changing Participant Connection Types Dial In Dial Out You can change the connection type used by the participant to connect to the conference For example when the participant cannot dial in and you want the MCU to dial out to the participant you can toggle between the dial in and dial out connection type nt The Connection Type parameter can be changed only when the participant is disconnected from the conference and both dial in and dial out parameters are defined in the Participant Properties Identification dialog box If the dial in phone numbers are not defined for the participant when switching to dial
258. o press any key If no file was downloaded for a Message Type click Add Message File to download the audio file to the MGC unit s memory To see the procedure see Defining IVR Software Module Properties page 6 11 steps 5 8 13 Click Next The General dialog box opens x Name Messagetle Lock OFF Billing Number Added to GA Removed from O84 Next Q amp A Questioner Secure ON Secure OFF Requires Chairperson First to Join the Cont FIRST ACA xl Add Message File X First to Join the Conf Se Eam This dialog box lists additional audio messages and prompts that may be played while joining the conference or during the On Going Conference 14 In the Name column select the required message type and then select the message audio file to be played when the operation is performed or when the selected event occurs 6 25 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 6 7 IVR Service Properties General Messages Message Type Message Description Lock ON Indicates that the conference is now locked to dial in participants This message is played to all the conference participants Lock OFF Indicates that the conference is now unlocked to dial in participants This message is played to all the conference participants Billing Number Requests the participant to enter a code for billing purposes Added to Q amp A Confirms that the participant was added to the Q amp A queue and h
259. of source noise and volume they produce The Auto Gain Control AGC mechanism balances noise and volume of the received audio signals for conference participants AGC is applied to all incoming audio streams before mixing and dynamically changes the amplification of the input signal to provide a constant output amplitude The intensity of input signals can vary due to the following factors e Microphone properties and adjustments e Background noise e Speaker s distance from microphone e Speaker s manner of speech The AGC option is applicable to all participants using Audio resources The AGC option is enabled in the system cfg in the AUDIO PLUS FLAGS section By default the AGC flag is set to YES and when defining new participants the AGC option is selected In some cases you may need to disable AGC for a participant during a conference You can enable or disable AGC using the participant s right click menu or in the Participant Properties dialog box For more details about participant properties modifications see Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties on page 2 49 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Modifying the Participant s User Defined Properties In the Participant Properties dialog box User Defined fields you can enter or edit additional information that identifies the participant such as the email address company name or job title The User Defined fields are displayed by def
260. on A T1 line coding format substituting each group of eight consecutive zeros with an established pattern See also T1 line A 1 Appendix A Glossary Abbreviation Term Bandwidth Defines the information carrying capacity of a channel In analog systems it is the difference between the highest frequency that a channel can carry and the lowest measured in hertz In digital systems bandwidth is measured in bits per second The larger a connection s bandwidth the more data can be transmitted in a given amount of time allowing for greater video resolution and more sites in a conference See Line Rate BAS Bitrate Allocation Signal BAS codes are used to exchange information about capabilities and commands between devices at opposite ends of a digital video connection B Channel Bearer Channel A channel in a span or in a group of spans that carries audio visual data The ISDN circuit switched bearer channel is capable of transmitting 64 Kbps of digitized information Explanation Bonding Bandwidth ON Demand INterpolarity Group A transmission protocol that aggregates two 64 Kbps B channels to function as one 128 Kbps channel When using several BRI channels Bonding means that only one D channel serves all BRI channels while the remaining D channels are used for data transfer See also BRI Bps Kbps Bits and kilobytes per second a unit of bandwidth that is the amount of data that can flow during one second over a commun
261. on PseworY arid Gea Service etd tn 233 oosmr OK 02 00 00 246 2284 276252 097603 5555 871 25 1000 OK 02 00 00 199 267161 271781 1000 87 285 2033 O K 02 00 00 207 107842 055960 2324 871 pe 46788 OK 02 00 00 177 2285 046692 295591 1471 95 aaaa O K 02 00 00 238 001702 006960 2949 BSS audio 7 OK 02 00 00 233 2298 130261 1234 5678 871 The system displays the dial in number entry and Chairperson passwords conference Numeric ID and the H 323 Network Service prefix of the Meeting Room in the respective columns MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Defining a New Audio Only Entry Queue To define a new Audio Only Entry Queue If you are not using the Entry Queue Service shipped with the software and if you have not already done so define the Entry Queue Service For more details see Chapter 6 Defining a New Entry Queue Message Service on page 6 41 1 Connect to an MCU and expand its tree 2 Right click the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories icon and then click New Entry Queue a Vi H E Audio S Audio EQ IP Aviv DP Cascade EQ 243 Default Conference D Engineering a EQ ADHOC CP a EQ ADHOC VSW a OE oe Sales eeting Rooms Entry Q Sales quarterly meeting Sip Factory I SIP Factories 14 New Meeting Room New Entry Queue New SIP Factory Print All aste Cirit Chl P Ctrl 5 13 Chapter 5 Meeting Rooms and Entry Queu
262. on using the appropriate code on the DTMF input device You can also end the session by clearing the Q amp A queue You can change the position of the participants in the queue moving a selected participant s position up or down the queue or to the first or last position in the queue e A Q amp A session requires the use of a DTMF input device e The Q amp A session managing options are applicable only to conferences with an assigned IVR Service running on an Audio card Controlling Q amp A Queues with the Toolbar You can easily manage the Q amp A queues using the dedicated toolbar Enable this toolbar by clicking a participant icon in an On Going Conference or by clicking the icon of a participant waiting in the Q amp A queue MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition The Q amp A toolbar contains the following buttons Pes eon oa Clear QA Clears all participants from the Q amp A queue E El Table 4 1 Q amp A Toolbar Buttons Next Questioner Lets the next participant in the Q amp A queue or the selected participant ask a question Add Participant to B Adds a participant to the Q amp A queue Q amp A become the next questioner Move participant to a Moves the participant to the end of the Q amp A last position in Q amp A gi queue View All Q amp A m To view only participants waiting in the Q amp A Participants 72 queue View All To view all participants in the conference Q amp A Parties out of 1
263. onference enables Operator Assistance and managing participant connections to the conference in attended conferencing services Select Audio to define an Audio Only conference Note In the Audio Look and Feel mode Audio is automatically selected 2 19 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants 2 20 Table 2 1 Conference Properties General Continued Field Option Supported Network Remarks Remarks History Select the type of network to be used by the conference participants e IP Only SIP and H 323 participants can join this conference Note This option enables you to select an audio algorithm specially suited for IP networks e IP ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS Participants using all types of network connections can join this conference Using up to 300 characters you can enter any text regarding the conference This text will be included with the conference properties and is also saved to the CDR file as part of the conference record to be retrieved later To add a new remark enter text in the Remarks box and then click the Update Remark button Note If the text is too long split it into several remarks updating the text after each remark At the scheduling stage only one remark can be entered Additional remarks can be entered during the On Going Conference Displays all remarks that were entered or updated for this conference by operators and were saved
264. onference to a designated participant usually the chairperson meeting organizer The conference chairperson can perform certain operator s functions such as start a voting session control the Q amp A session mute incoming parties place the conference on hold and lock or unlock the conference All chairperson functions can be performed either via the WebCommander interface or using DTMF codes from the participant s endpoint MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Participant and Conference Level Operations Operators can perform functions on conferences that affect individual participants or can affect the conference on the whole Participant Level Operations The following operator actions are performed at the participant level Make dial out connections Change the participant connection type dial in dial out Disconnect and reconnect participants Name undefined dial in participants Change the properties of a disconnected participant Designate a participant as an Exclusive Speaker Designate a participant as a VIP Control the participant s listening and broadcasting volume Mute or un mute a participant Modify user defined parameters for the participant MGC Manager only Move a participant to an operator conference attended conference only Move a participant to the home conference attended conference only Place a participant on hold attended conference only For management operations performed during an
265. onferences where the blast dial out feature is activated automatically using the DTMF code 25 the free text field must start with a digit as shown in the example 9Duke Ext p345p222p e Brackets Brackets indicating a dial string Bracket are context sensitive and only this type of format is to be used Extension Ext ext EXT are permitted text prefix Code indicating that a string consisting of a series of digits are to be used during dial up Note More than one extension number is optional certain IVR systems request that you first dial a department and then extension number e p Induces a pause of 1 second before transmitting the next digit or DTMF code There is no limit to the number of p s in a dial string Note When using one second intermissions it is important to note that each IVR system has different content and timing of dialog sequences Correct timing for output of DTMF digits might determine whether a call can be successfully completed 2 53 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants Table 2 10 ISDN PSTN T1 CAS Properties and Identification Dialog Box Meet Me Per This field is enabled only for Dial in participants Select e Party The participant dials a single number e MCU Conference Select this option when a single dial in number is used by all dial in participants connecting to the MCU The participants are routed to the appropriate co
266. onnects to the conference This tone is heard by all the conference participants currently connected to the conference but not by the connecting participant If Roll Call is enabled the system announces the self recorded name of the participant connecting to the conference End Time Alert Tone x Min the end of conference reminder is played once to all the connected participants x minutes before the end of the conference The x value is defined during the conference setup If Roll Call is enabled the system plays the special audio message The conference is about to end 3 21 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences Noisy Line Detection Mechanism and Automatic Muting 3 22 Noisy Line Detection Mechanism analyzes the participant s line signal in order to detect a noisy line and notify the operator Noise on a participant s line can be caused by background noise faulty equipment and noises emanating from the line itself Noisy Line Detection is enabled and disabled on MCU level in the system cfg by defining the detection sensitivity For more details see the MGC Administrators Guide Chapter 5 During an On Going Conference you can monitor noisy participant lines by selecting the Noisy Line monitor filter See Monitor Filter on page 3 17 When the Noisy Line filter is enabled the indicating icon appears in the Connection column if a noisy line is detected by the system MGC Manager VERSION 7 5
267. or a participant who is currently taking part in an On Going Conference You can change the VIP status of participants during a conference VIP participants are indicated with the VIP a icon To designate a participant as a VIP 1 In the Browser Monitor or Status pane right click the participant s icon and then click Properties The Participant s Properties Identification dialog box opens Planning Dept 1 Properties Connection Info2 H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Advanced Name Planning Dept 1 Connection Info1 Connection Type Interface Type Dial out ju H323 bad Participant IP Signaling Port 255 255 255 255 1720 Alias Name Alias Type john H323 ID 7 Extension Identifier String 456 User Defined 1 User Defined 2 Planning Dept head local office User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 EAE R tho i Gdns than Gin mace D R Audio Ony OK Cancel Apply Select the VIP check box to assign the new status to the participant and then click OK The selected participant becomes a VIP in the On Going conference The other participant s properties are unchanged 4 15 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences To revert the VIP status to regular participant In the Participant s Properties Identification dialog box clear the VIP check box and then click OK The selected
268. ord modification process the chairperson can select whether to modify the conference password or the chairperson password A sequence of voice messages and chairperson actions follows to complete the password modification Table 4 5 describes this sequence If the chairperson or a participant exits without the password confirmation the password is not updated 4 69 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Changing passwords is not permitted when a conference is in any of the following modes Table 4 5 Password Modification DTMF IVR Sequences Chairperson or participant enters the Press one to change conference required change password DTMF password Press two to change the code 1 or 2 or presses 9 to exit the chairperson password Press nine to menu exit the menu Chairperson or participant enters 1 Please enter the new conference password Press the pound key to complete Chairperson or participant enters 2 Please enter the new chairperson password Press the pound key when complete Chairperson or participant enters 9 Press nine to exit the menu and exits the menu Chairperson or participant enters the Please re enter the new password new password Password Press the pound key to complete confirmation request Chairperson or participant confirms The password has been successfully the password System confirms changed update While confirming
269. ormation on Network Services refer to the MGC Aadministrator s Guide Volume II Chapter 3 Sub Service Name This field is applicable to ISDN participants only If a sub service is used enter the sub service name exactly as it appears in the selected Network Service definition If left blank the default sub service defined in the selected Network service is used Num type Select the type of program to be used when connecting to ISDN ATM MPI participants The available options are Unknown National International Network Specific Subscriber Abbreviated Taken from Service These options represent programs provided by the carrier and are defined in the Network Service Select Taken from Service to indicate that the program should be retrieved from the Network Service definition Node Type Select the node type from the drop down list The available options for ISDN ATM MPI participants are e MCU Select this setting for a dial out participant in a DTMF Enabled Cascaded conference For more details see MGC Manager User s Guide Volume ll Chapter 1 e Terminal default Use this setting at all other times 2 57 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants Table 2 11 ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS Participant Advanced Continued Recording Designate the ISDN T1 CAS participant as an audio recording port connected to an external recording device Select one of the following e None
270. ou need more than this you can use Ad Hoc conferencing which enables you to instantly start and connect to multipoint conferences from your endpoint without prior reservation or scheduling For more details about Ad Hoc conferencing see MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Entry Queues 5 2 An Entry Queue is a special routing lobby to which one or several dial in numbers are assigned Participants are guided by voice prompts which are part of the Entry Queue Service to connect to this lobby and are routed to their destination conferences according to the conference Numeric ID or password that they enter using touch tone signals DTMF codes Entry Queues remain in a passive state when there are no participants in the queue and they are automatically activated when a participant dials the Entry Queue number The Entry Queue makes it possible to use a limited number of PSTN ISDN T1 CAS dial in numbers for all the conferences and to use toll free numbers for conferences which are charged to the meeting organizers Entry Queues that were defined for video conferencing can also be used for Audio Only conferences provided that the audio algorithm is set to G711 telephone standard This means that there is no need to define separate Entry Queues for Audio Only conferences However if VTX 1000 endpoints MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition are used for confe
271. pant s endpoint Through the conference IVR queue where they enter the conference entry password chairperson password or additional information Wait for the Operator s assistance The IVR Service assigned to the conference is set to Attended mode On Hold for Operator Assistance MCU Conference1 Numeric ID 1234 Password 34567 Conference Conference t1 Numeric ID Password 34567 ph aq sada a 1300 fi 9 71356 Entry IVR Queue Service Numeric ID 1222 w ISDN PSTN A Endpoint a ISDN PSTN Endpoint IP Network Service Prefix 925 Conference2 Numeric ID 1300 Password 71356 Figure 2 2 Dial in connection via Entry Queue with Numeric ID In the example in Figure 2 2 one or several dial in numbers are allocated to an Entry Queue In addition a numeric ID is assigned to each conference and a conference password and chairperson password may be defined Conference participants are provided with the dial in number string H 323 or URI SIP and the appropriate conference numeric ID and passwords When participants dial in using the number they were given they connect to the Entry Queue where they are requested to enter the appropriate conference Numeric ID or password depending on the MCU configuration According to this numeric ID or passwords participants are routed to the appropriate conference 2 11 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only
272. pants who are currently Participants assigned to the conference gt To add selected participants from the selected database Group User Template file or LDAP directory to the conference e Click the name of the participant in the Pre Defined Participants list e Click the Add Participant gt gt button The participant s name appears in the Conference Participants list Add Participant Del To remove a participant from the conference Delete Click the name of the participant in the Conference Participant Participants list e Click the Delete Participant button The participant s name is removed from the Conference Participants list and from the conference but not from the database or User Template file 2 31 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants 2 32 Table 2 3 Conference Properties Participants Continued Field Option Allow Undefined Min Participants Max Participants Dial Out Manually Select this option to let undefined participants to connect to the conference When enabled undefined participants can connect to the conference until the maximum allowed number of participants Max Participants is reached or until the MCU resources allocated to the conference are used up Note This option is automatically selected when the Meet Me per Conf or Entry Queue Access options are selected in the Properties General tab Define the total number of pa
273. pants who connect to a conference to hear the messages in the preferred language Language settings are defined per service and therefore are the same for a given conference that is all the participants in the same conference or in the same Entry Queue will hear audio messages and prompts in the selected language The IVR Properties enable you to define the languages that will be used in any of the IVR Message Services or Entry Queue Services Several IVR Messages can use the same language but only one language may be selected for an IVR Message Service or an Entry Queue Service The IVR Properties function also enables you to select the audio file to be used for each message type in each language and to download the messages to the MCU memory The IVR Properties are defined for both IVR Services and Entry Queue Services To define the IVR Properties 1 Expand the MCU Configuration tree 2 Right click the VR Msg Services icon and the click Properties H U Product Management Normal Ga MCU Configuration iE Cards E Connections tui New IVR Service ssa New Entry Queue Service WBE Perens am a Paste As Ctrl P 1 Oy Hh qi Messages Status gti nz H Profiles ag Recording Links Ta On Going Conferences 0 On Going Gateway Sessions 0 rer Participants Queue 0 EEN Reservations 3 H Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 14 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition The IVR
274. participants transmission rate and phone connections You can use a Reservation template to schedule a conference to start immediately On Going Conference or to start automatically at a predefined date and time Reservation For information on defining a reservation template see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 7 Default Reservation Templates Five default Reservation templates are installed with the MGC Manager e Default Audio is the only Reservation template designed for Audio Only conferencing It includes the default IVR Service Chapter 1 VoicePlus Overview 1 12 When you first start the MGC Manager application the Reservations in Database window automatically opens listing the Default group in the Root tree REE A Root Name LineRate Audiodlg Video Session Meet Me Per Con E gt Defaut te 5 E Default Audio E DeFaut Audio SEB Defaut_coP SElpDefaut_CoP 384kbps Auto Continuous Presence Classic JE Default _Video Ei Defaut _video 384 kbps Auto Continuous Presence Classic p g ab sw cp fpabsw ce 384 kbps Auto Continuous Presence Software z 2 EP video Switch E18 Video Switch 384 kbps 56 G722 G711 Video Switching E weboffice Figure 1 1 Reservations in Database Window You can push or drag the Main window sizing handle to resize the window and display the Reservations in Database window beside or beneath the Main window The MGC Manager automatically
275. participants who have been placed on hold Welcome no wait Select this check box to display participants who are in Welcome no wait status for Greet and Guide conferences Welcome wait Select this check box to display participants who are in Welcome wait status for Greet and Guide conferences Attended Select this check box to display participants who are currently being attended Dial In Numbers Dial In Numbers Define the dial in numbers used by participants to access Entry Queues Meeting Rooms or conferences Only participants dialing these numbers are displayed in the Participants Queue window 7 17 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing Table 7 5 Participants Queue Filter Options Continued Dial In Numbers To define the dial in numbers cont 1 Click the plus icon to add a range of dial in numbers The Add Dial in Range dialog box opens Add Dial in Range d x First Phone Number Last Phone Number EO O ll O In the First Phone Number box enter the first dial in number in the range of numbers to be used for filtering In the Last Phone Number box enter the last dial in number in the range of numbers to be used for filtering To use one number enter the same dial in number in the First and Last Phone Number boxes Click OK The dial in numbers range appears in the Participants Queue Filter dialog box Repeat steps 1 4 to define additional dial in number ranges to be filtered
276. pe Select the appropriate alias type before entering an H 323 Only alias name H 323 ID alphanumeric ID E 164 digits 0 9 URL ID URL style address Email ID email address format Transport ID IP address port number Party Number identical to the E 164 format Notes Although all types are supported the gatekeeper capabilities dictate the Alias Type to be used mainly H 323 ID and E 164 Refer to your gatekeeper documentation for information on its supported alias types 2 61 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants Table 2 12 H 323 and SIP Participant Properties Identification Continued Field Option Extension Identifier This is the DTMF string sent to the recording or other User Defined fields 1 4 Broadcasting Volume Listening Volume Audio Only 2 62 DTMF activated system an outgoing DTMF operation initiated by the MCU This is useful for identifying extensions associated with SIP users Each type of recording system has a specific DTMF string structure for example when using the Prairie recording services In any or all of the four User Defined fields enter general information for the participant such as the participant s email address telephone number company name location or any required information The titles of the User Defined fields can be modified in the Database Manager gt Defaults gt User Defined Defaults and loaded
277. peeding up the operator s work 7 11 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing Listing Participants in the Participants Queue Window The Participants Queue list contains all the participants who are currently waiting for operator assistance and the participant who is currently being assisted by the operator in the Operator conference When starting the MGC Manager for the first time in a new installation or after Ly upgrading to a higher version the Participants Queue window is automatically displayed empty To bring the window on top select the Participants Queue window in the window menu To display the Participants Queue window On the Main toolbar click the Participants Queue Window icon ae e In the Browser pane double click the Participants Queue icon The Participants Queue window opens Participants Queue Prod Mgmt 172 22 138 116 0 x Name State Queue Access Time Destination Conf Operator Called Number VIP Big vebbie Attended On hold by IVR Faulty connected Dec 10 2003 15 18 35 Audio 1 ACCORD by you D lz Onhold On hold by IVR Connected Dec 10 2003 15 19 57 Audio 1 Q Michelle Onhold On hold by IVR Connected Dec 10 2003 15 18 40 Audio 1 FB zoe Onhold Asked for private help Dec 10 2003 15 18 55 Audio 1 The following participant parameters are displayed in the Participants Queue window Table 7 2 Participants Window Columns Name The participant s name and an icon indica
278. perations Performed During On Going Conferences Rescheduling Conference Reservations 4 56 In some cases you may want to reschedule a reservation so the conference will start earlier immediately or later than scheduled To reschedule a conference reservation 1 Expand the current Reservations tree 2 Right click the Reservations icon and then click Properties New Participant FS Copy Res Paste Participant Ctrl Paste Participant As Gtri P Delete Del Print Reservation The Reservation Properties dialog box opens 3 Click the Scheduler tab Properties Alpha 12 x General Schedule Settings Participants Starting Time Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri 28 3 1 2 4 5 6 78393 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Select a different Starting Date and Starting Time as required To start the conference immediately change the date to the current date and the starting time to the current time Click OK The Conference Properties dialog box closes Ifscheduled to start in the future the Reservation remains in the Reservations list Ifscheduled to start immediately the Reservation becomes an On Going Conference and is moved to the On Going Conferences list Deleting Recurring Reservations You can delete a single recurring reservation or delete all the scheduled recurrences Deleting a single scheduled re
279. person Password 000123 Numeric ID Name MER User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 r Supported Network Jir IF ISDN ATM MPI F Enty I Meel p Conference Type p Media Standard budio C Mee Video Audi Remarks Update Remark Remarks History ll Cancel Apply Help 2 Enter the conference Billing code general information such as company name contact person email address telephone number etc and if required modify the conference or chairperson password 3 Click OK From this point on the modified information is applicable to this On Going Conference 4 53 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Changing the Conference Duration At times operators may find it necessary to extend the duration of a conference or terminate a conference before its scheduled completion time The conference can be manually or automatically extended or terminated To manually extend an On Going Conference You can extend a conference s duration after the conference has started 1 Open the Conference Properties dialog box 2 Click the Scheduler tab 3 Modify the conference Ending Time Polycom2 Properties Product Management xi General Scheduler Settings Participants Ongoing State Recording Ending Date EE January 2005 i gt Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 2 2 2 30 3 1 2 3 4 5 amp 7 8
280. predefined participants The source can be a Participant database User template file or an LDAP directory when available The list is empty if no source was selected in the Pre Defined Participant file box or if no participant was defined To list participants in this box select the appropriate source file in the Pre defined Participants file box Search Use this option when the list is very long to display only those participant names that match a particular character string Type the string in the Search text box As each character is typed all participants starting with the specified character string are displayed in the Pre Defined Participants list 2 30 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 2 3 Conference Properties Participants Continued Pre Defined Displays the full path and file name of the selected User Participants File Template file or database from which the Pre Defined Participants list is read To select the appropriate participant template source e Click From Database to select another database Group The Open Parties in Database dialog box opens letting you select the database and Group from which the Participant templates should be listed Click Browse to load a different User Template file and use the standard Windows convention to locate the required file Click Directory to list participants defined in an LDAP compatible directory Conference Lists the names of the partici
281. printing or clerical errors Information in this document is subject to change without notice MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table of Contents VoicePlus Overview 2 6 i ccc ces eiessecincanieeaus 1 1 About the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition 1 2 User s Guide Conventions sssi ccc eeeeeeecseseeeeseseseeeeeeaseeeeaes 1 2 VoicePlus Main Features 00 cccecesscescessececeeseeeseeeseeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeaeeees 1 3 System IREQUIFEMENIS anaiss e Yale iacsteusdtuas EEEE Se 1 6 IPLETEQUISICES vi ssesseasteeieusivescubsuvasteacestaviostassestonscussuntorsscnasteecasevioates 1 6 VoicePlus Commands Shortcut Keys oo eee eeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 7 Audio LOOK amp Feel secies ccacccsesaeceasseascastasceaeceassanctaestavsteceaectanstaesanctaese 1 10 Audio Only Conferences seseesesessreeseresrrsesrrsesesesereesrsessreesrneesrseserees 1 11 Reservation Templates soworeriiririrsrtiirteti oriee 1 11 Default Reservation Templates ceeseceseesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 11 Connecting to an On Going Conference occ eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 15 Dial in SIP Participants 2 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaes 1 16 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Paricinanls lt csdiscccsccicdincevcestexisctudces cd 2 1 About CONLELENCES sesonon ianoaaeie EEEE AENEA 2 1 Conference Scheduling Methods ssessssssssesesssssssesreresrssreseesesee 2 1 Scheduled Conferences 3 siissswiisisiisvesavaviatassavnsava
282. properties that can be modified during a conference see Chapter 4 Participant Level Operations on page 4 4 3 27 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences Monitoring ISDN Telephone Participants 3 28 To view the ISDN participant s properties during a conference 1 In the participants list in the Status pane the Browser pane or the Monitor pane double click the participant icon Alternatively right click the appropriate participant icon and then click Properties Alternatively open the On Going Conference Properties dialog box and double click the participant s name in the Participants tab The Participant s Properties Identification dialog box opens Polycom 2428 _ 000 Properties Connection Info2 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Advanced Connection Info1 Name Poly Connection Type Interface Type Dial in 4 ISDN Z Participant Caller ID 320 MCU Numbers 175 Meet me per MCU Conference 7 User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 You can view the name and the dial in numbers that were used by the participant to connect to the Entry Queue Conference MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition The following Identification parameters can be modified for a connected participant during an On Going Conference Table 3 8 ISDN Participant Propertie
283. r clicks the Next Questioner button in the Q amp A toolbar If the participant is muted the operator must first unmute the participant e The operator selects the participant to ask the question and clicks the Next Questioner button in the Q amp A toolbar e The chairperson enters the appropriate code on the DTMF input device to let the first participant in the queue ask the question The default code The selected participant s icon now indicates the change of status to current questioner a On Going Conferences 2 R HG ACCORD oA Demo EQ_954 000 Ending Participant Questions Ending the questioner session can be done by participants or by the chairperson e The operator can end the questioner session by right clicking the Questioner icon and then clicking Stop Questioner Session e Participants can indicate that they have completed asking the question by entering the appropriate DTMF code the default code is 22 4 41 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences e The chairperson can stop the current questioner by pressing the appropriate DTMF code the default code is 23 g EV Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Move Participant gt Copy Participant Ctrl C Cut Ctrl x Delete Del Exclusive Speaker Hold To Home Conf F3 Mute Audio Ctrl M Turn Off AGC Properties The selected participant s icon reverts to the passive normal status Removing Participants from t
284. rence or who is using a noisy line Need Assistance Participant who has requested the operator s assistance Participant and has yet to be assisted by the operator In Attended conferences this option also includes the participants who have to wait for the operator s assistance to connect to the conference Asked Question Participants who are waiting in the Q amp A queue Noisy Line Participants whose audio channel is detected as noisy The system uses a special algorithm to identify the endpoints that add background noise to the conference Noise on a line can be caused by a variety of sources ranging from background noise faulty equipment and noises emanating from the line itself Note The Noisy Line Detection feature is enabled disabled in the system cfg by defining the detection sensitivity For more details on this feature see Noisy Line Detection Mechanism and Automatic Muting on page 3 22 3 18 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Automatic Monitoring of Conferences In addition to the filtering feature you can configure the system to automatically monitor all the conferences according to the last Monitoring Filter that was set for any conference in the MGC Manager When this feature is enabled the system automatically displays all the conferences and all the participants that require the operator s attention to the Monitor pane in the MGC Manager main window To toggle between automatic a
285. rence parameters can be done in two ways e When setting up a New Reservation from the Reservations list e When setting up a New Reservation from a Reservation Template The recurrence parameters are defined in the Conference Properties Scheduler dialog box To define the recurrence parameters for the reservation 1 In the Conference Properties Scheduler dialog box select the month year and day of the first conference and the conference Starting Time as described in Table 2 7 Reservation Properties Scheduler on page 2 42 2 Click the Reservation Recurrence button The Reservation Recurrence dialog box opens Reservation Recurrence x m Recurrence Pattern Weekly x Recur every fi Week s on l Sun T Mon I Tue M Wed I Thu J Fi T Sat Range Of Recurrence End After fi Occurrences C End By Thu 9 December 2004 3 Define the following parameters 2 44 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 2 8 Reservation Recurrence Settings Recurrence Select the recurrence frequency Pattern e Daily By default all the days of the week are selected To exclude a certain day of the week for example the weekend clear the check box Weekly By default the system selects the day of the week as set in the Scheduler calendar for the first reservation You can also define the recurrence interval in weeks For example if you want the reservation to
286. rence to place On Hold b On the Conference toolbar click the Hold Conference button la De x 0 0 To release the conference click the conference icon then click the Release Hold button on the Conference toolbar From the Conference Properties dialog box a Inthe On Going Conference Properties dialog box click the Settings tab q1 Properties Product Management General Scheduler Settings Participants Ongoing State Recording r General Settings F Encrypt F Enable IVA S enice Msg Service Name lt lt Basic b If required click the Advanced button c Inthe General Settings pane select On Hold then click OK The dialog box closes To release the conference repeat steps a and b then clear the On Hold check box MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Modifying Conference General Parameters During an On Going Conference you can modify the following parameters e The conference Billing Code e General Information about the conference in the User Defined fields e The conference and chairperson passwords To modify the conference general parameters 1 Right click the On Going Conference icon and then click Properties The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Polycom2 Properties Product Management x General Scheduler Settings Participants Ongoing State Recording Conf Entry Password 0002 Web Chair
287. rencing a separate Entry Queue must be defined to allow participants to maintain the high audio quality For more information on Entry Queue Service definition see Defining a New Audio Only Entry Queue on page 5 13 A conference may be accessed by dial in participants directly or through an Entry Queue If you are defining a conference that is accessed through an Entry Queue you do not need to define the Meet Me Per Conference parameters Participants can be moved from the Entry Queue to a target conference that has the same line rate and media settings In audio conferences the audio algorithm may be different when IP Only participants connect to the Entry Queue or when the VTX 1000 endpoint is used Chapter 5 Meeting Rooms and Entry Queues Defining a New Audio Only Meeting Room To define a new Meeting Room 1 2 Expand the MCU tree Right click the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories icon and then click New Meeting Room The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Conference Properties xi General Settings Participants Meet Me Per Conf Recording Name if O o Conf Entry Password DOO o y O Duration Co Web Chairperson Password ss Billing si Numeric ID o y me Praduet Management User Defined 1 DO O i J Entry Queue Access User Defined 2 tt User Defined 3 r Supported Network CIP IP ISDN ATM MPI Remarks Update Remar Rema
288. rks History The Conference Type is automatically set to Meeting Room and the Meet Me Per Conference option is selected and cannot be cleared The Meet Me Per Conf tab is included in the Properties dialog box Define the conference general parameters such as name Numeric ID passwords and duration or use the system defaults for the conference duration and passwords if the MCU is configured to automatically allocate passwords For detailed description of these parameters see Chapter 2 Defining New On Going Audio Conferences on page 2 14 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition 4 Click the Settings tab The Conference Properties Settings dialog box appears These parameters are identical to the standard conference Settings parameters 5 Define the Settings parameters as described for the definition of On Going Conferences For more information see Chapter 2 Settings Parameters on page 2 21 6 Click the Participants tab to add defined participants mainly dial out either from a template or to define a new participant 7 Define the conference Participants parameters as described in the definition of new On Going Conferences For more information see Chapter 2 Participants on page 2 28 Meeting Rooms usually include undefined dial in participants therefore there is no need to predefine the parameters and capabilities of each endpoint telephone the participants are automatically detected
289. rn to the conference muted Un mute Reminder A message indicating which DTMF code the participant must enter to unmute his her line after returning to the conference muted Unmute and Return to A message indicating which Conference DTMF code the participant must enter to return to the conference unmuted Adjust SilencelT A message indicating which Sensitivity and DTMF code the participant must Unmute enter to adjust the sensitivity of the SilencelT algorithm and return to the conference unmuted Disable SilencelT and A message indicating which Unmute DTMF code the participant must enter to disable the SilencelT option and return to the conference unmuted 6 14 Continued 8 9 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 6 2 IVR Properties Message Types by Message Category Message Category Message Type Description SilencelT cont Participant Detected as Noisy Informs all participants that the line of a specified participant has been detected as noisy and has been muted Conference Id Download the files requiring the participant chairperson to enter the required Conference ID to connect to the conference If required click Download File to download the appropriate audio file to the Polycom MCU memory The Install File dialog box opens Install File Prod Mgmt 172 22 138 116 9 xj sie Install fI Browse Proceed Ce Click the Browse butto
290. rnal database application Number of User Enter the number of times the participant will be able to Input Retries respond to each menu prompt before being disconnected from the IVR system or being moved to queue for the operator s assistance The default value is 3 You can define up to 5 retries Timeout for User Enter the time in seconds that the system waits for Input input from the participant If that time elapses without participant input the system registers an input error DTMF Delimiter Enter the key that will be used to indicate a DTMF command sent by the participant or the conference chairperson Possible keys are the pound key or star 6 19 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services 4 Click Next The Welcome Message dialog box opens Welcome Message x IV Enable Welcome Messages General Welcome Message WELCMPNS AC Add Message File I On hold for Operator Assistance lt Back Cancel Help 5 Select Enable Welcome Messages to enable a welcome message when the participant connects to the conference You can select to play a General Welcome Message a Conference Welcome Message or to remain On Hold for Operator Assistance If the Enable Welcome Messages option is disabled the Welcome message is skipped and the participant will hear the next prompt in the IVR menu and the conference is set to Entry Queue Access forcing participants to go through both queues wh
291. rs the T1 CAS numbers are listed under the ISDN Network Service To do so the MCU must be first configured to allow T1 CAS participants The appropriate flag has to be set in the system cfg file and a T1 CAS Network Service has to be defined in the system For more information see the MGC Administrator s Guide Defining a T1 CAS Network Service If participants in the same conference use different Network Services such as two different ISDN Services or an ISDN and T1 CAS Service the Meeting Room can be assigned different phone numbers for each of the Network Services used by the participants to connect to the conference In that case use the manual allocation method If no dial in number is defined the system assigns the MCU number defined in the ISDN Network Service If there is no number defined for the MCU in the ISDN Network Service the system allocates the first free number in the dial in numbers range defined in the ISDN Network Service Manually Assigning Phone Numbers to the Conference 10 To manually assign a phone number to the conference in the SDN Service pane click the plus pf button MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition The Meet Me Service dialog box opens x Service Name l Dial in Number 1 Dial in Number 2 Cancel a Define the following parameters Table 5 2 Meet Me Service Options eee et rr Service Name Enter the name of the ISDN Network Service or the T1 CAS N
292. rson in a conference can dial out and invite the called person to participate in the conference This option is identical to the Add New Participant option available to the operator function is changed in the VR Service DTMF Codes dialog box For more details about defining an IVR Service with DTMF codes enabled see MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 2 Defining a New IVR Message Service Ly The Invite function is available to all participants when the permission to use this To invite participants to join the conference 1 Press 4 on your touch tone telephone to dial out to an individual You are moved to a side area and a dialing tone is heard 2 Dial the number of the individual you want to invite and press the pound lt gt key to start the dialing process If the invitee answered the call you can do one of the following Admit the invitee and continue dialing out to invite other individual by pressing 1 on your touch tone telephone 4 71 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Disconnect the invitee and continue dialing out to invite other individual by pressing 2 on your touch tone telephone Admit the invitee and return to the conference thus ending the Invite session by pressing 3 on your touch tone telephone Disconnect the invitee and return to the conference thus ending the Invite session by pressing 4 on your touch tone telephone If the invitee did not
293. rticipant Templates Database or the User Template file To define a new participant 1 Use one of the following methods to open the Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens a In the On Going Conference Properties Participants dialog box click the New button Expand the On Going Conferences list right click the icon of the conference to which to add the participant and then click New Participant Expand the On Going Conferences list click the icon of the conference to which to add the participant and then click the New Participant button ei on the Conference toolbar Expand the On Going Conferences list click the icon of the conference to which to add the participant and then press the shortcut key default key is lt F8 gt 2 49 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants Identification Advanced The Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens Default Participant Properties Default Participant Properties Identification Advanced Name Name Default Participant Default Participant Connection Type nterface Type Connection Type Dial out X ISDN z Dialout v cas Participant Numbers Participant Numbers MCU Numbers MCU Numbers Extension Identifier String Extension Identifier String Meet me per Meet me per Party A Party ha User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 1 User Defined 2 ea eines Mateias U
294. rticipants for which the system reserves resources This number should include defined as well as undefined participants For example if the conference includes two defined participants dial in or dial out and you want the system to reserve resources for three additional undefined participants enter 5 in the Min Participants box If you enter 0 no resources will be reserved for the conference Participants will be able to connect to the conference if there are available resources Note The total number of conference participants is limited by the value set in the Max Participants parameter or by the maximum number of participants per conference supported by the MCU Enter the maximum number of participants who can connect to the conference at one time The maximum number is calculated taking into account both the defined and undefined participants Use this option to save resources for other conferences When set to Auto the maximum number of participants is determined by the maximum number of participants in a conference as supported by the MCU or the by the availability of MCU resources Select this option to designate an operator controlled dial out conference connection When this option is checked the participants remain in standby state until the operator manually connects each of the dial out participants to the conference MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 2 3 Conference Properties Participant
295. rvation Template depending on the conference definition mode 2 66 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Dialing in from an H 323 Endpoint Simple Dial in Using the IP Card Address In simple dial in the participant dials the IP address of the IP card installed in the MCU so no gatekeeper is required The participant is routed to the destination conference according to the participant s IP address defined for the participant in the conference Endpoint IP Endpoint IP 196 123 38 129 a W 196 123 38 146 IP 172 22 138 146 IP 172 22 138 146 Conference1 IP Card 1 MCU 1 IP 172 22 138 146 Conference2 IP Card 2 IP 172 22 138 148 IP 172 22 138 148 2 Endpoint IP 196 123 12 89 Figure 2 4 H 323 Participant simple dial in using the IP Card address In this dial in mode the MGC Manager operator must manage the system resources by distributing the participant connections between the cards This is done by giving the IP address of the appropriate H 323 card to each of the participants Simple Dial in Using the IP Card Alias Participants can use the alias of the IP card installed in the MCU to dial in In this mode a gatekeeper is required in order to provide address translation and routing to the IP module When the participant enters the IP card alias the call is routed to the gatekeeper that forwards the call to the appropriate IP card according to its table of aliases and IP addresses 2 67
296. s Identification Indicates the participant s name User Defined 1 4 In either or all user defined fields you can enter additional data about the participant for example the email address telephone number or any other identifying information Broadcasting The volume at which the participant is heard by other Volume participants If not modified the volume stays at the default level 5 Listening Volume The volume at which the participant hears other participants If not modified the volume stays at the default level 5 Indicates whether the participant is defined as a VIP If required the participant s Identification and Advanced parameters can be modified during an On Going Conference but only if the participant is disconnected from the conference For more details on the Identification and Advanced tabs see Chapter 2 ISDN PSTN T1 CAS Participant Definition on page 2 51 To obtain information regarding the participant s connection status click the Connection Info1 tab 3 29 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences The Participant Properties Connection Infol dialog box opens Planning Dept 1 Properties Connection Info2 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Advanced Connection Infot Participant State Waiting for dial in Disconnect Channels Status MCU Phone The following information is displayed for the connected participant Table 3 9 ISDN Partic
297. s Continued Click this button to define a new participant and add to the list of participants of this On Going Conference You can save the new participant defined by this method during the conference definition in the database or in the current User Template file that is listed in the Pre Defined Participants File box If you do not save the new participant s definition in the database or in the User Template file the participant s properties will be deleted once the On Going Conference ends For a detailed description of participant definition see Defining Participant Properties on page 2 49 9 Use one of the following methods to list participants in the Predefined Participants list and add participants to the conference e Add participants from the database e Add participants from the User Template file To list participants from the database a Click the From database button to display the list of participants stored in the database in the Pre Defined Participants If you are not logged into the database the Database dialog box opens Database Login x Login Name Po LYCOM Password ft I Create Login Record Cancel 2 33 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants 2 34 b Enter your Login Name and Password and click OK The Open Parties in Database dialog box opens Open Parties in Database x Database Name AccordDB 7 Filter
298. s the Entry Queue used for conference access or the IVR service assigned to the conference are set to attended mode Using the enhanced tools for attending participants conferences the operator or coordinator makes sure all invited participants are on hand then sees to it that the conference proceeds according to plan Usually the operator initiates the call to connect participants and greets the participants when connected In Attended conferences the operator can assist participants by greeting and guiding them to the appropriate conference or by helping them join the conference if they have failed to enter the required information password When dial in participants connect to an Entry Queue or IVR enabled conference they initially hear a welcome message If the Entry Queue or IVR enabled conference is set to attended mode the Entry Queue Service or the IVR Service is configured to Wait for Operator Assistance they are then moved to the Participants Queue where they must wait for an operator to attend to them The participants can be in one of the following stages Greeting Welcome Attended On Hold and Conferencing The operator controls the participants connections to the conference moving them from one stage to another Special icons are used to indicate the participant status in an attended conference Greeting In the Greeting stage participants connect to the Entry Queue or directly to an IVR enabled conferen
299. s IP based LAN networks including the Internet IMUX or Inverse A feature that allows high speed serial data streams to be Multiplexing divided into multiple of 56 or 64 Kbps for transmission over public digital switched networks PSTN At the remote end all the channels are phase aligned and synchronized to recreate the original data stream IP Internet Protocol The working protocol that forms the basis of the internet ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network A set of protocol and interface standards voice video and data that comprise a telephone network There are two types of ISDN lines BRI and PRI N Local Area Network A group of computers and other devices ITU T Standard International Telecommunications Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector formerly CCITT The international organization that produces official standards for telecommunications linked via a network s operating system LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol Leased Line A dedicated PRI line supplied by the telephone company See also PRI line Line Rate The amount of bandwidth used by a communication device measured in Kbps kilobytes per second MCU Multipoint Control Unit Device which allows more than two sites to be connected in a video or audio conference MPI Multi Protocol Interface Supports connection to endpoints using communication protocols such as V 35 RS 449 and RS 530 over a serial connection A 5 App
300. s are as follows menu e To exit this menu press any key e To request private assistance press Star 0 To request operator s assistance for the conference press 0 0 To mute your line press star 6 To unmute your line press pound 6 General Chairper To lock the conference to dial in LDRHP2 ACA son Help menu2 participants press star 7 continuation To unlock the conference press pound 7 To increase your volume press star 9 To decrease your volume press pound 9 To mute all participants except yourself press star 5 6 58 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 6 16 Default IVR Messages Continued General The available touch tone keypad PRTCHP ACA Participant Help actions are as follows menu To exit this menu press any key To request private assistance press star 0 To mute your line press star 6 To unmute your line press pound 6 To increase your volume press star 9 To decrease your volume press pound 9 To ask a question press star 2 2 To cancel your question press pound 2 2 6 59 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 6 16 Default IVR Messages Continued General Invite The available touch tone keypad INVITHP ACA Help menu actions are as follows e To exit this menu press any key e To obtain an outside line and dial out to an invit
301. s displayed in the expanded tab Table 3 14 VoIP Participant Properties Connection Info1 Participant State The current connection status of the participant Note This status is indicated in the Monitor and Status panes see Table 3 2 describes the Monitor pane columns on page 3 7 Use the button do reconnect a disconnected participant or to disconnect a connected one Disconnect Reconnect Channels Status The following parameters are displayed in this table Channel Faulty Bit Rate Fraction Loss Peak Jitter Peak Packets Latency The checked boxes indicate the multimedia channels Audio and Data that are connected Sync Counters Status The following parameters are displayed in this table Channel Source Position Protocol Sync Loss 3 40 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 3 14 VoIP Participant Properties Connection Info1 Continued FECC Token Not relevant in Audio Only Content Token Not relevant in Audio Only Channel Info Displays detailed information about a selected channel You can click this button to expand gt gt or to collapse lt lt the additional Channel Info pane In the Channel Status table Channel column select a channel to monitor and click this button Note The displayed information varies according to the properties of the selected channel If required modify the following parameters disconnect the connected participant
302. s similar to adding messages to the IVR Service For more information about adding new messages to the Entry Queue Service see page 6 10 Defining IVR Software Module Properties steps 5 8 12 13 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 6 14 IVR Properties Operator Assistance Messages Operator Select the audio file to be played to the participant Assistance when Indication The participant requested help Message The participant entered an incorrect conference password The On Hold for Operator Assistance option is selected in the IVR Welcome Message dialog box Disconnection If the Enable Operator Assistance on Password Failure Message option is disabled select the audio file to be played when the participant enters an incorrect password and is to be disconnected from the conference Select the Enable Operator Assistance on Failure check box to enable operator assistance when the participant fails to correctly access the conference When this option is cleared a participant who failed all password attempts will be automatically disconnected from the conference after hearing the disconnection message Click Finish to complete the Entry Queue Service definition The new Entry Queue Service is added to the IVR Message Services list 6 47 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services Assigning Entry Queue Services to an Entry Queue To enable the system to route participants to their conferences ac
303. s the meeting has started and is being recorded Recording Failed A message indicating that the recording system has failed to record the conference To assign the audio file if one was downloaded to the message type click the appropriate table entry The Message Type appears at the bottom of the table and the drop down list of message files is enabled If the appropriate message was not downloaded you can download it now by clicking Add Message File For more information see Defining IVR Software Module Properties page 6 10 steps 5 8 16 Click Next 6 29 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services The Operator Assistance dialog box opens Operator Assistance E x M Enable Operator Assistance Operator Assistance Indication Message OPERHELP ACG zi Add Message File Disconnection Message GOODBYE ACA Add Message File 17 Select Enable Operator Assistance to allow the operator to assist participants waiting in the IVR queue or during the On Going Conference when requesting help 18 When this option is enabled select various audio messages to be played when the participant fails to enter the correct conference password Table 6 8 IVR Service Properties Operator Assistance Operator If the Operator Assistance option is enabled select the Assistance appropriate audio file to be played to the participant in Indication the following instances Message e The participant requested help
304. s the participant and MCU phone numbers or IP address Numbers alias depending on the supported network and connection type IP Address In dial in connection displays the CLI number ISDN or IP SIP Address address alias of the participant calling the MCU marked by the letter P and the MCU number or IP address alias dialed by the participant marked by the letter M In dial out connection displays the dialed number ISDN IP address alias H 323 o URI SIP of the participant Connection Identifies the defined type of participant s connection to the Type conference Dial out The MCU conference dials to the participant Dial in The participant calls the MCU conference a Direct Leased Line connection ISDN fA connection only 3 12 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 3 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns Continued Column Description Name a Audio Indicates whether the participant s audio is connected and the status of the audio channel Sync Indicates whether the participant s site is synchronized If Yes the Media Member field displays the media types that are synchronized If No the Media Member field displays the media types that are unsynchronized For more details see Table 3 4 on page 3 16 Tx Rate The line rate in which data sent from the MCU is received by the endpoint Rx Rate The line rate in which data sent from the endpoint is received by the MCU Retries Left
305. se IVR functionality chairperson blast dial out to multiple pre defined participants chairperson and participant DTMF code control of conferences voting and Question amp Answer management Ad Hoc Auto Cascading VTX 1000 Resource allocation and more Touch tone commands MGC Manager and Web controls are the tools that are used to manage both Audio Only conferences and participants and the part of the video bridge that handles Audio Only and IVR functionality in both Audio Only and Video conferencing The VoicePlus system uses voice prompts to guide participants to their appropriate conferences These prompts can be customized to enable multi lingual support In Audio Only conference setup only the functions operations and icons relevant to this type of conference are displayed in the MGC Manager while functions and operations relevant to video conferences such as ATM network connection or video options are hidden and disabled The Polycom VoicePlus conferencing system provides a way to hold meetings with participants at multiple remote sites It enables end users to conduct all types of meetings from the office or from the road using a telephone whether they require a high level scheduled operator assisted conference or the convenience of on demand or reservationless meeting Audio Only conferences include only Audio participants In an Audio Only conference participants can connect to the conference using different network conne
306. sed in the following procedure You can perform operations using shortcut keys from the following panes and lists e Browser Status and Monitor panes On Going Conferences list e Browser and Status panes Participants Queue list Participants Queue window To move a participant or place him her on hold using shortcut keys 1 Select the icon of the participant to be operated on 2 Use the appropriate shortcut key as follows Table 7 8 Shortcut Keys Default Shortcut Operation Key To move the participant to the Operator conference To place the attended participant on Hold lt F4 gt To move the participant to the Home destination conference For further details on the individual operations refer to the explanations in the section Performing Operations using the Right Click Menu on page 7 36 7 43 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing Moving a Participant Interactively Standard MS Windows multiple selection techniques can be used in the following procedure You can drag and drop a participant to the Operator or Home conference from the following panes and lists e Browser Status and Monitor pane Operator conference list e Browser and Status pane Participants Queue list e Participants Queue window To drag and drop a participant to the Operator conference 1 Expand the On Going Conferences list in the Browser pane to display the Operator Conference icon 2 Drag the icon of the parti
307. seesseeeeseeeeeeeees 4 12 Changing Participant s Status to Conference Chairperson 4 13 Designating a VIP Participant 0 0 cee eee eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 15 Adjusting Participant s Broadcasting and Listening Volume 4 16 Muting and Unmuting Participant s Audio oe eee 4 17 Enabling Disabling Auto Gain Control AGC 00 eee 4 20 Modifying the Participant s User Defined Properties 4 21 Conference Level Operations eee eeeeseeeeceeeeeceseeeesetaneeseaees 4 22 Adding New Participants to a Conference eee eeeeeeeeeeee 4 22 Muting Dial In Participants Upon Connection eee 4 28 Adding Remarks During an On Going Conference 0 4 31 Locking and Unlocking a Conference 0 0 ec eeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeee 4 32 Managing Question and Answer Sessions cseeeeeeeeeeeees 4 36 Controlling Q amp A Queues with the Toolbar eee 4 36 Adding Questioners to the Q amp A Queues ce eeeeeeeeteeeeeeee 4 37 Changing Participant s Position in Q amp A Queue 4 40 Allowing Participant Questions cesseseesecereeeeeeeeeeneeeee 4 41 Ending Participant Questions s nisaisroserisriisdronei 4 41 Table of Contents Removing Participants from the Q amp A Queue oe 4 42 Clearing Q amp A QUEUES ou ee eeceeeceseceeceeeeseceneeneeeaeeeneeneees 4 42 Managing Voting Sessions 0 cece ee eseesseeeeseeseceeeseeseeeeees 4 43 Conducting a Voting Session wo eee ee eeeeeeseeeeseeeee
308. ser Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 Broadcasting Volumef5 Listening Volume 5 een Aine A fon M Audio Only I vir Save Patticipant Cancel Help I Save Participant Cancel Help 2 Define the following parameters Table 2 9 Participant Properties and Identification Dialog Box Enter a unique name for the participant using up to 80 characters Connection Type Select the connection type e Dial in Participants call the MCU at conference time You provide the participant with the MCU s dial in number When selecting this type the Meet Me Per options are enabled This connection type is applicable to ISDN ATM and MPI interfaces Note Dial in T1 CAS participants can only connect as undefined participants 2 50 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 2 9 Participant Properties and Identification Dialog Box Continued Connection Type e Dial out At the predefined conference start cont time the MCU calls the participant When defining the participant you must enter the participant s number Note This is the only selection available for the T1 CAS participant If the Dia Out Manually option is disabled in the Conference Properties Participant tab the MCU automatically calls the participant at conference time If this option is enabled the operator must connect the participant Interface Type Select the network type used by the participant to connect
309. servation If you select the Range of Recurrence End By option the Reservation Recurrence dialog box expands to show the calendar in the Ending Date Of Recurrence pane Click the required date in the displayed calendar month or select a different month using the scroll arrows Note The MGC Manager calculates the number of occurrences according to the selected frequency and the date range Click OK to apply the settings The Reservation Recurrence dialog box closes The Scheduler settings of the reservation are completed Define the remaining conference parameters as described in Table 2 7 Reservation Properties Scheduler on page 2 42 Click OK to complete the definition of the new reservation Once the reservation has been defined the system automatically creates the recurring reservations The name of each of the recurring reservations is derived from the name of the first reservation followed by sequential numbers using the format lt name gt _X where X is its sequential order For example if the first reservation is named Demo and the number of occurrences is three the system creates three reservations naming the first Demo_1 the second Demo_2 and the third Demo_3 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Listing Reservations The Reservations defined on the MCU are stored in the Reservations list To view the Reservations list in the Browser pane Expand the MCU tre
310. splays the voting results parameters updating them as the voting session progresses The Command buttons let you select optional operations 4 45 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 2 In the Voting Settings section define the Voting Session parameters as follows Table 4 2 Voting Session Settings Title Enter the Voting subject This title is also used as the file name when saving the results to a file Choices The digits 0 to 9 on the left which cannot be selected or modified represent the digit that should be pressed on the telephone keypad or the remote control Enter a descriptive text for each of the choices to be selected during the voting session For example for digit O enter the first choice for digiti enter the second choice etc This text will appear in the voting results and is saved together with the voting results Anonymous Vote Select this option to conduct an anonymous voting session Start Time Displays the voting session start time Click Apply to save the voting settings 4 Present the voting choices to all the conference participants Once the voting choices are clear to all the voting stage can start 5 Inthe Command buttons section click Start Voting Click Start Voting Alternatively start the voting session from the touch tone telephone or remote control by entering the appropriate DTMF code the default code is 81 6 Participants enter their
311. ssword request according to the required system behavior There are three types of password options for dial in and dial out participants Select the required system behavior as follows Request password The system requests the participant to enter the conference password and after the correct conference password is provided moves the participant to the conference Request digit identifier The system requests the participant to press a random key and after any key is pressed moves the participant to the conference This option prevents an answering machine or voice mail from entering the conference None The participant is moved to the conference without being asked to enter a password or press a key If you have enabled the conference password request and you have defined the system behavior for dial in and dial out participants select the various audio messages that will be played in each case The following audio file messages are available Table 6 6 IVR Service Properties Conference Password Request Select the message that prompts the participant for Password the conference password MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 6 6 IVR Service Properties Conference Password Retry Password Select the message that requests the participant to enter the conference password again when failing to enter the correct password Request Digit Select the message that prompts the participant t
312. sted the operator s assistance for the conference Usually this means that the operator is requested to join the conference The participant was placed on hold is not currently taking part in any conference While on hold the participant hears background music 3 15 Chapter 3 Monitoring On Going Conferences Participant s Audio Status Table 3 4 lists icons that indicate the current audio status of the participant Table 3 4 Participant Audio Status Icons The audio channel of the participant is connected The audio channel is disconnected This participant is the current conference speaker This participant is the conference s Exclusive Speaker in this mode all other participants are automatically muted The audio channel of the participant is muted by the participant from the endpoint The audio channel of the participant is muted by the operator The audio channel of the participant is muted by the participant and the operator The audio channel of the participant is muted by the operator and the MCU The audio channel of the participant is muted by the participant and by the MCU The audio channel of the participant is automatically muted by the MCU Exclusive Speaker mode The audio channel of the participant is muted by the participant operator and the MCU 3 16 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Monitor Filter You can view only participants who have connection proble
313. t parameter Table 2 10 on page 2 52 6 Click OK to complete the participant definition The participant is added to the On Going Conference Reservation or the Reservation Template depending on the conference participant definition mode 2 58 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition IP H 323 and SIP Participant Definition If you select H 323 or SIP in the Interface Type field the fields change in the Participant Properties dialog box Most of the parameters are common to both H 323 and SIP participants Dial out H323 H323 1D H323 Participant Properties SIP Participant Properties 2 59 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants 7 Define the following parameters Table 2 12 H 323 and SIP Participant Properties Identification Field Option Participant IP Signaling Port SIP Address SIP Only 2 60 Enter the IP address of the participant s endpoint e For H 323 participants Ina Dial out connection enter the IP address or alias of the endpoint to be called by the MCU If you entered only an alias the gatekeeper can resolve the participant s alias into an IP address In a Dial in connection the participants IP address or alias are entered The IP address or alias is used to identify and route the participant to the appropriate conference e For SIP endpoints Participant IP is optional as thes
314. t Back Next gt Cancel SilenceIT is used to automatically mute participant lines that were detected as noisy 24 Select Enable SilenceIT to enable this feature 6 33 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services 6 34 25 Select the SilenceIT options and voice messages The following table summarizes the SilenceIT options Table 6 10 IVR Service Properties SilencelT Messages SilencelT Message SilencelT Menu Unmute and Return to Conference Return to the Conference Muted Unmute Reminder Description Select the message played when a participant is automatically muted by the MCU It notifies participants that the line has been muted and indicates which DTMF code they should enter to listen to the available options The default voice message is Your line has been muted due to a noisy line For list of available options press 9 Note This message is mandatory Select the message that indicates which DTMF code participants should enter to return to the conference unmuted The default voice message is Press 1 to unmute and return to the conference Note This message is mandatory Optional Select this check box to enable the option to return to the conference muted Then select the message indicating the DTMF code to use The default voice message is Press 2 to return to the conference muted Select the message that indicates which DTMF code to enter to unmute the participant s l
315. t 9 gt to listen to a menu offering one of the following options e Return to the conference unmuted default e Return to the conference muted e Reduce the level of the SilenceIT Sensitivity and return to the conference unmuted e Disable the SilenceIT feature for this conference and return to the conference unmuted SilenceIT IVR messages are described in Table 6 10 on page 6 34 SilenceIT guidelines e SilenceIT is supported for Audio Only participants in IVR enabled Audio Only and Video conferences e SilenceIT is not supported when the participant is moved to the Operator conference Attended status e SilenceIT is not supported in recording ports e SilenceIT is not supported in cascading conferences Enabling SilencelT In some cases the SilencelIT algorithm is not sensitive enough to the noise level causing speech to be muted or not muting music and noise To prevent this problem SilenceIT includes a mechanism that enables the system to measure the audio energy and based on this measurement fine tune the system usage of the SilenceIT algorithm To reliably measure the audio energy and apply the SilenceIT fine tuning mechanism speech and noise music must have sufficient energy and be consistent across all audio ports 6 7 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services 6 8 SilenceIT is enabled by performing the following steps 4 Measure the audio energy and based on this measurement configure a syst
316. t Properties dialog box opens d Set up the required properties in the Identification and Advanced tabs of the Participants Properties dialog box For a detailed description of participant definition see Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties on page 2 49 e Click OK The new participant is listed in the Conference Participants list f If required repeat steps c to e to add more participants g Click OK to complete the conference editing The new participant is listed in all the panes of the main window 4 24 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition To copy the participant properties from an On Going Conference or Reservation Participants can be added to a conference by copying their parameters from another conference You can copy a participant from one On Going Conference or Reservations to another 1 Inthe Browser pane expand the Reservations or the On Going Conferences list and then expand the Reservation On Going Conference icon to list its participants 2 Right click the icon of the participant to copy and then click Copy Participant Audio party Connect Participant Ctrl R Moun Dactideen gt T X Delete Del Q amp A Management b Dial In Ctrl I Properties 3 Right click the conference reservation icon to which to copy the participant and then click Paste Participant Stop Monitoring Monitor Filter New Participant F8 Terminate Del Past
317. t are part of the Entry Queue Service The user inputs touch tone signals in response to voice prompts 6 1 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services Conference Access Dial in participants can access the conference by using the following connection methods e Directly e By means of the IVR Service e By means of the Entry Queue Directly No IVR Service is assigned to the conference The participants dial the conference dial in number or string and connect directly to the conference In this case the functionality provided by the IVR Service is unavailable IVR Queue Access Participants dial the conference dial in numbers and are connected to the conference IVR queue Using the telephone or endpoint keypad participants input the required information to menu driven scripts and voice prompts that are part of the IVR Service Once the correct information is entered the callers are connected to the conference You can define a range of IVR Services and customize the menu driven scripts and voice prompts to meet different needs or languages The IVR Services are assigned at the conference level and different conferences may use different IVR Services or the same IVR Service may be used for all conferences Entry Queue Access Entry Queue is a call routing method in which all participants dial the same dial in number Participants are guided to the conference using menu driven scripts that are part of the Entry Queue Service Us
318. t of the window dialog box or menu that you want to be changed with your next action Click can also select a menu option or activate a toolbar button e Right click is used when you press and release the right mouse button to open a pop up menu e Click OK means that you can either click the OK button with the mouse or press the lt Enter gt key on the keyboard e Keyboard keys appear in capital letters between these two symbols lt gt For example the Shift key appears as lt Shift gt e The plus sign between two key names indicates that you must press and hold down one key while pressing down the second key For example press lt Alt gt lt P gt means that you press and hold down the Alt key while you press the P key e Bold type indicates the word or the character that you should type into a text box or the name of the menu or command that you should select Lg VoicePlus MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition e Italic type indicates the name of a menu a dialog box or a field to or from which to select or enter an option e Expand a tree means to click on the plus sign next to it or double click the icon to display the dependent branches e Tips and notes are indicated by an icon and appear in a special format on a gray background For example This is an example of the type of note that you encounter in this User Guide Main Features The Polycom VoicePlus conf
319. t set otherwise the participant is automatically moved from the queue Greeting stage to the conference Conferencing stage If an Entry Queue is used in conjunction with an IVR Service assigned to the conference the caller is automatically transferred from the Entry Queue to the IVR Service If not set otherwise the participant is automatically moved from the IVR Greeting stage to the conference Conferencing stage Operations Performed Using IVR Services In IVR enabled conferences various operations can be performed by the operator or the conference chairperson These operations are available only when an IVR Service is assigned to the conference The VR software module enables the operator to perform the following operations using the MGC Manager application or the MGC WebCommander application These operations are described in Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing The IVR software module enables participants and the conference chairperson to perform the following operations from their endpoints using DTMF codes For a list of default DTMF codes see Chapter 4 Managing Conferences Using DTMF Codes on page 4 63 6 3 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 6 1 DTMF Enabled Actions and Permissions remana e Mute Meet Me participants upon their connection to the Chairperson conference 6 4 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Using Roll Call The Roll Call feature is used in IVR Message
320. tatuses are indicated by special Secure mode icons Table 3 6 lists the icons that indicate the statuses of a Secure Audio Only conference Table 3 6 Secure Conference Status Icons ea Dee Secure conference Faulty secure conference End of conference alert for Secure conference The audio only On Going Conference is in the Secure mode the conference properties and the participants list are hidden An exclamation point appears next to the secure conference icon when one of the following statuses occurs Empty Single Party Not Full Faulty Connection Resource Deficiency and Bad Resources For a detailed description of these statuses see Table 3 2 on page 3 7 Note Due to the locked nature of conference no action can be taken to resolve these problems The secure conference is about to end Audio Tones MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition While defining the conference parameters you can enable any of the audio tones Entry tone Exit tone and End of Conference Alert tone to be heard during an On Going Conference If Roll Call is enabled for the conference the audio tones are replaced with an appropriate message Exit Tone is played when a participant disconnects from the conference All the connected participants hear this tone If Roll Call is enabled the system announces the self recorded name of the participant leaving the conference Entry Tone is played when a participant c
321. ted MCU Ongoing MRs the system searches for the destination conference in the list of On Going Conferences and Meeting Rooms on the connected MCU All Ongoing Meetings 12h MRs the system searches for the destination conference in the list of On Going Conferences Meeting Rooms and Reservations scheduled to start in the next 12 hours on the connected MCU This table displays the search result according to the Search Value and Search In criteria To move the participant to the destination conference select the conference from the list and then click the Move button or use the displayed shortcut key Note if the participant s destination conference is known for example when the participant has requested help the destination Home conference is automatically listed Click the To Home Conf button to move the participant back to his her original conference Click this button to create a new On Going Conference and move this participant to it The Conference Properties General dialog box opens letting you define the conference parameters 7 25 Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing Table 7 6 Attended Participant Dialog Box Fields Continued Field Option Start Meeting Room Auto Attend Next Participant 7 26 You can move a participant to a Meeting Room only if the Meeting Room is active However the first participant connecting to the Meeting Room cannot be moved from the attended Participants Q
322. ter a digit to connect to the conference This message is played to dial out participants when requested to enter a digit to confirm connection Requests the participant to enter the chairperson identifier key required to identify them as the conference chairperson When the participant has been identified as the conference chairperson requests the participant to enter the chairperson password When the participant enters an incorrect chairperson password requests the participant to type it again Download files that are played during an On Going Conference when performing various operations such as when locking or unlocking the conference These operation are defined in the IVR Service General dialog box Operator Assistance Indication Message The message is played when the participant is waiting for the operator s assistance 6 13 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 6 2 IVR Properties Message Types by Message Category Continued Message Category Message Type Description Operator Disconnection Informs that the participant is Assistance Message being disconnected from the cont conference Roll Call Download the various Audio files that are played when the Roll Call option is enabled for a conference SilencelT SilencelT Menu Played to announce the SilencelT feature options Return to Conference A message indicating which Muted DTMF code the participant must enter to retu
323. the conference this option saves resources and billing costs No participant has connected to the conference for a predetermined time and the conference is idle The period is defined in the Before First Join x Min field 2 25 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants 2 26 Table 2 2 Conference Properties Basic Settings Continued Field Option After Last Quit x Min Media Settings Audio Alg Roll Call All the participants have disconnected from the conference and the conference is idle for a predetermined time The period is defined in the After Last Quit x Min field Basic This parameter determines the audio compression ratio The higher the ratio the more processing resources are required Select the preferred audio algorithm for the type of conference you define e 56 G711 56 G711 default In mixed network conferences this is the only available option and therefore the field is read only 8 G729 G723 1 Available only for VoIP IP Only conferences Note When the VTX 1000 check box is selected the system automatically uses the G 722 7 algorithm for the connection between the endpoint and the conference The Roll Call feature of the IVR Message Service is used to record participants names and to play them back when participants enter or leave a conference The chairperson can request the system to play the names of all connected conference part
324. the system is automatically set as the default IVR Service However if several services are defined for the MCU you can choose another service as the default IVR Service This default IVR Service will be used in conferences where the IVR Service function is enabled but no specific IVR Service was selected To select the default IVR Service 1 List the IVR Services defined in the system For details see Listing IVR Message Services on page 6 37 2 Right click the icon of the IVR Message Service to set as default and then click Set As Default The selected IVR Message Service appears in bold both name and icon indicating that it is the current default service BE IVR Msg Services 98 Set As Default Delete Del Copy Print IVR Data Properties Ra IVR Msg Services iB ATTENDED ea aa Attended EQ all gt fq Deb Q HE Deb_IVR EE Demo I R als Hg 260 HE R60 Default IVR Service MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Modifying IVR Message Service Properties You can change one or several properties of a defined IVR Service at the setup stage To modify the properties of an IVR Service 1 List the IVR Services defined in the system For details see Listing IVR Message Services on page 6 37 2 Right click the icon of the IVR Message Service to modify and then click Properties Alternatively double click the icon ep IVR Msg Services B seer pg Setds Default Delete Del
325. ting Room is a conference that has no allocated resources on the MCU or a starting date and time It is defined once but can be activated many times For more details see Chapter 5 Meeting Rooms on page 5 1 e Operator a private one on one conference that enables the Operator to assist participants without disturbing the On Going Conferences or without being heard by other conference participants An Operator Conference can have up to two participants only the operator and a participant For more details see Chapter 7 Defining an Operator Conference on page 7 5 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Both Standard and Meeting Room conferences have the same conference parameters The difference between them is the method by which they are scheduled and started and what happens to the conference once it ends IVR and Entry Queue Services Interactive Voice Response IVR is an application that allows participants to communicate with the conferencing system over the telephone or through their endpoint s input device such as a remote control IVR automates the connection to the conference process and enables the participant to perform various operations during the On Going Conference By combining the input of the caller with the menu driven scripts participants can call the conference dial in number and use a touch tone telephone or the endpoint s remote control to interact with the conferencing system The IV
326. ting the participant status Possible statuses are On Hold Attended or Wait For more information about participant statuses see Chapter 3 Additional Participant Statuses Queue Access The date and time the participant has entered the Time Participants Queue State The reason the participant is moved to the Participants Queue and the connection status MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 7 2 Participants Window Columns Continued Destination The name of the destination conference when known or Conference the name of the Entry Queue to which the participant has connected The conference name is known when the participant was connected to the conference and is moved from the conference to the Participants Queue or the Operator conference For example when the participant has requested assistance Operator The login name of the operator who is assisting the participant This information is useful when there are several operators logged into the same MCU from different computers Called Number The number the participant has dialed Usually identifies the dial in number assigned to the Entry Queue or Meeting Room Indicates whether the participant status is defined as VIP The Participants Queue window can be moved to any position on screen and you can configure its size as you can do with the MGC Manager Main Window and the Templates window application is saved for the next time you start MGC
327. tly stored on the Audio card and the status of the downloading process if you check the status during the download process To view the status of the audio messages 1 Expand the MCU tree and then expand the MCU Configuration tree 2 Right click the IVR Services icon and then click Messages Status New IVR Service New Entry Queue Service Paste 4s Gtrl P Paste Gerly Messages Status Properties MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition The IVR Messages Status dialog box opens listing the VR messages audio files that are currently stored on the Audio card sorted according to their duration The list also displays the file s name and its download status I R Messages Status x Download Status Ok Message Type Message Name Status 32 Sec LDRHLP1A ACA Downloaded 32 Sec LDRHLP2 ACA Downloaded 32 Sec PRTCPHLP ACA Downloaded 32 Sec INVITHLP ACA Downloaded 32 Sec VOTEHLP ACA Downloaded 16 Sec PINCHANG ACA Downloaded 8 Sec OPERHELP ACA Downloaded 8 Sec CONFPASS ACA Downloaded 8 Sec ENTRYOPT ACA Downloaded 8 Sec LEDRPASS ACA Downloaded 8 Sec RERECRD ACA Downloaded 8 Sec BILLING ACA Downloaded 8 Sec NEWPIN ACA Downloaded 8 Sec NEWCHAIR ACA Downloaded 8 Sec NEWCNFRM ACA Downloaded oft gt m Messages Occupancy 2Sec 4Sec Maximum number of audio messages for each category Currently stored files The Messages Occup
328. to enable the chairperson to enter a code for billing purposes If no file was downloaded for a Message Type click Add Message File to download the audio file to the MGC unit s memory For more details see Defining IVR Software Module Properties page 6 17 steps 5 8 9 Click Next The Conference Password dialog box opens x IV Enable Password Messages Dial In Request Password Fequest Password CONFPASS ACA 7 Add Message File C Request Digit C None 7 Retry Password CONFRTRY ACK Add Message File Dial Out Request Password Add Message File C Request Digit Request Digit None wa a 6 23 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services 6 24 10 11 12 Select the Enable Password Message check box to request the conference password before moving the participant from the IVR queue to the conference You can configure the IVR system to behave differently when handling dial in and dial out participants Dial in participants can be requested to enter the conference password as a security measure to ensure that only authorized participants connect to the conference When the system connects dial out participants to the conference in many cases there is no need for the password dial out participants are predefined in the system but they may need to press a key to confirm presence to be able to join the conference IVR Message Services may be configured for pa
329. to the CDR file This field can be read during the conference but not at the reservation stage Entries are shown in ascending order latest entry showing at top of list MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Settings Parameters 4 Click the Settings tab to define the conference settings The Properties Settings dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management E z z a a a a m m The setup parameters in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box are grouped in two main panes General Settings and Media Settings By default only the Basic settings are displayed when you first open this dialog box These are the parameters that you will usually need to modify 5 If you want to change the system defaults for the advanced parameters click the Advanced gt gt button to view and modify additional settings for each of the main panes 2 21 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants The Advanced options remain on display until you click the lt lt Basic button again The MGC Manager remembers the last dialog box setting In most conference definitions you do not need to modify the Advanced parameters All the fields in the Settings dialog box display the default values defined in the MGC Database Manager Conference Defaults according to the conference type selected in the Properties General dialog box For more details o
330. to the MGC Manager application For details see Chapter 3 Note The User Defined fields are displayed only if the Show User Defined Fields in Participant Parameters box is selected in the Database Manager gt Defaults gt User Defined Defaults You can control the volume of the audio transmitted from the participant to the conference broadcasting volume as well as the listening volume for the participant To adjust the volume move the slider The volume scale is from 1 to 10 where 1 is the weakest and 10 the strongest volume The volume of each endpoint s audio at connection time is set to 5 One movement of the volume slider increases or decreases the volume by one unit equivalent to 3db When checked indicates an Audio Only participant This option is automatically selected and cannot be cancelled For T1 CAS participants In Audio Look amp Feel mode When defining participants during Audio Only conference definition in the Conference Properties Participants dialog box MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 2 12 H 323 and SIP Participant Properties Identification Continued When checked changes the participant s status to VIP to distinguish participants who require special attention Note The VIP status can also be changed during the On Going Conference Save Participant Optional When checked saves the participant definition as a template in the User Defined template file or in
331. types of participants to be displayed in the Participants Queue window by creating filters that set criteria according to which participants appear in the list Use the Participants Queue window to view participants connecting to a specific Entry Queue according to the Entry Queue s dial in number or according to a specific status Filters may be used in two modes when you are connected to the database and locally without logging into the database When you are connected to the database filters created and saved in the past may be used for the current session If you are not connected to the database you can only create a filter to be used immediately and locally without being able to save the filter for future use or add it to the list of filters Two types of filters may be defined Personal Filters and Public Filters Personal Filters are created by operators for their personal use Public Filters can only be defined by a database user with permission to create Public filters and who has logged into the database For more details about defining permissions to create public filters see the MGC Manager User s Guide Vol II Chapter 6 Defining Permissions To define Participants Queue filters in the Database The default Filter is All all participants waiting in the Participants Queue appear in the Participants Queue window You can create a new filter and save it for future use 1 Ifyou are not already logged in
332. uch as lock or unlock the conference to dial in participants initiate a voting session become the conference exclusive speaker while muting all other participants and more This option is enabled in conferences in which the Conference Chairperson option is enabled in the assigned IVR Service 4 13 Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences To change a participant s status to conference chairperson Inthe Browser Monitor or Status pane right click the participant s icon and then click Change to Chairperson Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Copy Participant Ctrl C Cut Ctrl x Delete Del Exclusive Speaker OR arag Change to Chairperson Attend F2 Hold To Home Conf F3 Mute Audio Ctrl M Turn Off AGC Properties The selected participant becomes the conference chairperson and the icon changes accordingly To revert the chairperson s status to regular participant e Inthe Monitor or Status pane right click the chairperson s icon and then click Change to Regular Participant This feature can also be activated by the participant using DTMF codes MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Designating a VIP Participant During an On Going Conference you can designate a participant or a chairperson who requires special attention as a VIP The VIP status does not change the role of the participant You can assign this status when defining a new participant
333. ueue encrypted Note SIP participants do not support this type of encryption and therefore Auto should be selected For more details about encryption see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 Select the node type from the list e Terminal The default This setting is applicable for all settings that are not DTMF enabled cascaded conferences MCU Select this setting for a dial out participant in a DTMF enabled cascaded conference For more details see MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 2 65 Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences Reservations and Participants Table 2 13 H 323 and SIP Participant Properties Advanced Continued Quality Of Service Click this button to configure QoS for this participant For details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Quality of Service for IP Participants page 4 124 Enable PSTN For internal use only Dial in Save Participant Optional When checked saves the participant definition as a template in the User Defined template file or in the selected Database Group Note This check box appears only when defining a participant for a Reservation template in the User Template file or when defining a participant during a conference when Database Group is the source 10 Click OK to complete the definition of the H 323 and SIP participant The participant is added to the On Going Conference Reservation or to the Rese
334. ueue to the Meeting Room unless it is first manually activated To manually activate a Meeting Room 1 In the Search In list select an option to list Meeting Rooms 2 Inthe Conferences list select the Meeting Room to activate and then click the Start Meeting Room button Select this check box to automatically attend to the next participant in line When the current attended participant is moved to his her destination or Home conference the system automatically moves the next participant in line to the Operator conference The sequential order of participants in the queue is determined by the Next By selection MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 7 6 Attended Participant Dialog Box Fields Continued Determines the sort order of the Participants Queue When the Auto Attend Next Participant is selected this field determines who is the next participant in line that should be automatically moved to the Operator conference The list may be sorted according to the following criteria e Time The amount of time participants have been waiting in the Participants Queue This is the default sorting criteria When a participant is placed on hold his her time counter is reset Name The Participants Queue list is sorted by the participant name VIP Time Participants identified as VIP are listed first and the VIP list is sorted by time The remaining Standard participants are sorted according to the
335. ume 5 Save Patticipant Cancel Help Name Modify the participant s name to correctly display it in the Monitor and Status panes For more details see Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties on page 2 49 Connection Type Alter the participant connection from dial in to dial out or vice versa Phone Number or IP address Change the participant s dial in dial out phone number or IP dress as required Interface Type Change the participant s interface and protocol provided that the endpoint supports both ISDN and IP VIP Status Change the participant status from or to VIP Service Type Change the name of the Network Service that the participant is using to connect to the conference Lg MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition e AGC disable AGC when required enabled is the default You can change encryption settings during an On Going Conference only when the participant is disconnected Moving a Participant from one Conference to Another A participant can be moved from one On Going Conference to another on the same MCU using either one of two methods interactively drag and drop or from the participant s right click menu You can move individual participants or you can move several participants at the same time by using standard Windows conventions to select the participants to move To interactively move participants from one conference to another 1 Expand the
336. ute By MCU Indicates if the Audio channel has been muted by the MCU Gatekeeper Indicates the status of the participant s registration Status with the Gatekeeper and the bandwidth allocated to the participant e ARQ Admission Request Indicates that the participant has requested the gatekeeper to allocate the required bandwidth on the LAN Admitted Indicates that the gatekeeper has allocated the required bandwidth to the participant DRQ Disengage Request The endpoint informs the gatekeeper that the connection to the conference is terminated and requests to disconnect the call and free the resources None Indicates that there is no connection to the gatekeeper Requested The bandwidth allocation requested by the participant Bandwiath from the gatekeeper in the Admission Request measured in Kbps 3 42 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Table 3 15 VoIP Participant Properties Connection Info2 Continued Allocated The actual bandwidth allocated to the participant by the gatekeeper when the participant is admitted to the conference measured in Kbps Requested Info Some gatekeepers request an alive and well message Interval from the endpoint to keep the resources allocated to it This field indicates the frequency in Kbps in which this message is sent to the gatekeeper Gatekeeper Indicates whether the participant s call is routed via Routed the gatekeeper If required modify the fol
337. vailable the participant is connected and routed to the appropriate conference according to the participant s IP address Alias as defined in the Participant Properties dialog box If the resource is unavailable on the first IP card the system looks for the port on any of the available IP cards and allocate the resources 2 68 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition automatically according to their availability If no port is available the connection will be rejected Endpoint IP Endpoint IP 196 123 38 129 196 123 38 146 Alias 259 W a Alias 256 MCU Endpoint Endpoint Conference1 dials 45 dials 45 Participant 1 alias Participant 2 alias Conference1 Participant 3 alias IP Card 1 Gatekeeper Network Service Prefix 45 Conference2 Conference2 IP Card 2 Participant 1 alias Participant 2 alias Participant 3 alias Dials 45 W Endpoint IP 172 123 12 89 Alias 268 Figure 2 6 H 323 Participant Advanced Dial in The Gatekeeper behavior is dependent on the type of Gatekeeper service chosen in the Service Mode field IP Network Service Properties H 323 dialog box Currently only Polycom RadVision and VCON MXM Gatekeepers are known to support the Network Service Prefix option Gatekeepers of other manufacturers may encounter problems while defining such a conference For Gatekeeper functionality and interoperability in IP Network Services see the MGC Manager Administrator s Guide Chapt
338. vices icon and then click New Entry Queue Service 3g MCU Configuration iE Cards DA Connections H A IVR Msg Services H amp Network Services H Operators H a GateWay Configuration New IVR Service 808 Profi E i Profiles New Entry Queue Service og Recording Links Paste As Gtri P AV Message Services Ep On Going Conferences 0 Haste Guy Day Messages Status 5 On Going Gateway Sessions 0 d Participants Queue 0 H Reservations 0 Meeting Rooms amp Entry Queues 17 Properties 6 41 Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services 6 42 The Entry Queue Message Service dialog box opens x Entry Queue Service Name Deme Language for IVR ENGLISH E External Server Noe Number of User Input Retries 3 Timeout for User Input 5 sec DTMF Delimiter fe Back Next gt Cancel Help This dialog box enables you to define the general parameters of the Entry Queue Service Define the following parameters Table 6 11 Entry Queue Service Global Parameters C Entry Queue Type the name of the Entry Queue Message Service Service Name Language for Select the language in which the Audio Messages and IVR prompts will be heard The Languages are defined in the VR Properties dialog box External Server Select Conference NID to verify the conference Numeric ID with an external database application Select None to disable th

MGC Manager User's Guide VoicePlus Edition - Support

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents